RL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRL0202OM/enu/RL...2002 RL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this

2002 RL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Owner's Identification Form

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... i

A Few Words About Safety .......................................................................................................................... ii

Your Vehicle at a Glance ...............................................................................................................................2

Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................5 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.

Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................53 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.

Comfort and Convenience Features.......................................................................................................115 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.

Before Driving .............................................................................................................................................179 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.

Driving ...........................................................................................................................................................191 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.

Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................215 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.

Appearance Care.........................................................................................................................................275 Tips on cleaning and protecting your vehicle. Things to look for if your car ever needs body repairs.

Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................283 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.

Technical Information ...............................................................................................................................311 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.

Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ......................................................................325 A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us.

Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...............................................................................................................329 How to order manuals and other technical literature.

Index ................................................................................................................................................................. I

Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

The information and specificationsincluded in this publication were ineffect at the time of approval forprinting. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specificationsor design at any time without noticeand without incurring any obligationwhatsoever.

This Owner’s Manual covers allmodels of the 3.5 RL. You may finddescriptions of equipment andfeatures that are not on yourparticular model.

This Owner’s Manual should beconsidered a permanent part of thecar, and should remain with the carwhen it is sold.

Owner’s Identif ication

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

01/09/28 19:24:08 31SZ3660_001

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Acura, otherproperty, or the environment.

Several warranties protect your new Acura. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Acura is to readthis manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your car so youcan refer to it at any time.

Maintaining your car according to the schedules given in this manual helpsto keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. Whenyour car needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Acura dealer’s staff isspecially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Acura. YourAcura dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answerany questions and concerns.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Congratulations on your selection of the 2002 Acura 3.5 RL. We are certainyou will be pleased with your purchase of one of the finest luxury cars in theworld.

Introduction

WARNING:

i

01/09/28 19:24:15 31SZ3660_002

－

－

－

－

－

－

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thiscar safely is an importantresponsibility.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your car. You must useyour own good judgement.

on the car.

how to use this car correctly and safely.

A Few Words About Safety

Safety Messages

Safety Section

Safety Headings

Safety Labels

Instructions

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

01/09/28 19:24:29 31SZ3660_003

Your Car at a Glance

2

TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEEBBUUTTTTOONN

HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEEHHAANNDDLLEE

AAUUDDIIOO SSYYSSTTEEMM

CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLLSSYYSSTTEEMM

PPOOWWEERR WWIINNDDOOWWSSWWIITTCCHHEESS

DDRRIIVVIINNGG PPOOSSIITTIIOONNMMEEMMOORRYY

FFUUEELL FFIILLLL DDOOOORR RREELLEEAASSEEHHAANNDDLLEE

IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL((PP..5533))

MMIIRRRROORR CCOONNTTRROOLLSS DDIIGGIITTAALL CCLLOOCCKK((PP..9911))

((PP..9933))

((PP..9988))

((PP..8833)) ((PP..117799)) ((PP..118800))

((PP..112288))

((PP..111144))

((PP..110022))

01/09/28 19:24:59 31SZ3660_005

Your Car at a Glance

3

IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL BBRRIIGGHHTTNNEESSSS

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL

((PP.. 7700))

WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD WWIIPPEERRSS//WWAASSHHEERRSS((PP.. 6688,, 7700))

((PP.. 6666))

HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG LLIIGGHHTTSS

((PP.. 7711))

FFOOGG LLIIGGHHTTSS((PP.. 6677))

HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTTSS//TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALLSS((PP.. 6633,, 6666))

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR((PP.. 7711))

SSTTEEEERRIINNGG WWHHEEEELLAADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTTSS

VVEEHHIICCLLEE SSTTAABBIILLIITTYYAASSSSIISSTT SSYYSSTTEEMM OOFFFFSSWWIITTCCHH((PP.. 220022))

((PP.. 115588))

01/09/28 19:25:03 31SZ3660_006

4

01/09/28 19:25:05 31SZ3660_007

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat beltsproperly. It explains your Supple-mental Restraint System. And it tellsyou how to properly restrain infantsand children in your car.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.............Your Car’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8...........................................Airbags . 9

.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 10..........................Head Restraints . 10

..................................Door Locks . 10........Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 11

............................Protecting Adults . 12.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 12

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 12............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 13

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 145. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 15....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 17

7. Maintain a Proper Sitting................................Position . 17

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

........................Protecting Children . 20All Children Must Be

...............................Restrained . 20Children Should Sit in the Back

...........................................Seat . 21The Passenger’s Front Airbag

Poses Serious Risks...........................to Children . 21

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 23

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 23

...Additional Safety Precautions . 23General Guidelines for Using

...............................Child Seats . 24.......................Protecting Infants . 28

.........Protecting Small Children . 32.......Protecting Larger Children . 35

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 39

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 40

..Seat Belt System Components . 40......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 40

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 41

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 42Additional Information About Your

.....................................Airbags . 43........................SRS Components . 43

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 43

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 45How the SRS Indicator Light

.......................................Works . 46How The Side Airbag Indicator

............................Light Works . 47.............................Airbag Service . 48

...Additional Safety Precautions . 48.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 49

...................................Safety Labels . 50

Driver and Passenger Safety


5

01/09/28 19:25:11 31SZ3660_008

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed the greater therisk, but serious accidents can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.A seat belt is your best protection in

all types of collisions. Airbagssupplement seat belts, but airbagsare designed to inflate only in amoderate to severe frontal collision.So even though your car is equippedwith airbags, make sure you andyour passengers always wear yourseat belts, and wear them properly.(See page .)

Children are safest when they areproperly restrained in the back seat,not the front seat. A child who is toosmall for a seat belt must be properlyrestrained in a child safety seat. (Seepage .)

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance. (See page .)

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual. (See page

.)9

15

20

216


Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed

Keep Your Car in Safe Condition

Restrain All Children

Don’t Drink and Drive

6

01/09/28 19:25:25 31SZ3660_009

Your car is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some safety features do not requireany action on your part. Theseinclude a strong steel frameworkthat forms a safety cage around thepassenger compartment; front andrear crush zones that are designed tocrumple and absorb energy during acrash; a collapsible steering column;and seat belt tensioners thatautomatically tighten the front seatbelts in the event of a crash.

CONTINUED


Your Car’s Safety Features

7

((55))((77))

((66))

((22))

((11))

((99))

((88))((1100)) ((33))((88))

((22))

((77))((44)) ((66))

((11)) SSaaffeettyy CCaaggee

((22)) CCrruusshh ZZoonneess

((33)) SSeeaattss && SSeeaatt--BBaacckkss

((44)) HHeeaadd RReessttrraaiinnttss

((55)) CCoollllaappssiibbllee SStteeeerriinngg CCoolluummnn

((66)) SSeeaatt BBeellttss

((77)) FFrroonntt AAiirrbbaaggss

((88)) SSiiddee AAiirrbbaaggss

((99)) SSeeaatt BBeelltt TTeennssiioonneerrss

((1100)) DDoooorr LLoocckkss

01/09/28 19:25:34 31SZ3660_010

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

For your safety, and the safety ofyour passengers, your car isequipped with seat belts in all seatingpositions.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your car has airbags.

Your seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your seatbelts.

These safety features are designedto reduce the severity of injuries in acrash. However, you and yourpassengers can’t take full advantageof these safety features unless youremain sitting in a proper positionand

In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

When properly worn, seat belts:



Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

always wear your seat beltsproperly.

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, evenif you have airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

01/09/28 19:25:46 31SZ3660_011

Your car also has side airbags to helpprotect the upper torso of the driveror a front seat passenger during amoderate to severe side impact.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

Your car has a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the car andagainst other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the car.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag, andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.

CONTINUED



Airbags do not replace seat belts.

What you should do:

Airbags

9

01/09/28 19:25:59 31SZ3660_012

Keeping your doors locked reducesthe chance of being thrown out ofthe car during a crash. It also helpsprevent occupants from accidentallyopening a door and falling out, andoutsiders from unexpectedly openingyour doors.

Head restraints can help protect youfrom whiplash and other injuries. Formaximum protection, the back ofyour head should rest against thecenter of the head restraint.

Move the frontseats as far back as possible, andkeep adjustable seat-backs in anupright position whenever the car ismoving.

Your car’s seats are designed to keepyou in a comfortable, uprightposition so you can take fulladvantage of the protection offeredby seat belts and the energyabsorbing materials in the seats.

How you adjust your seats and seat-backs can also affect your safety. Forexample, sitting too close to thesteering wheel or dashboardincreases the risk of you or yourpassenger being injured by strikingthe inside of the car, or by aninflating airbag.

Reclining a seat-back too far reducesthe seat belt’s effectiveness andincreases the chance that the seat’soccupant will slide under the seatbelt in a crash and be seriouslyinjured.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force andspeed. So while airbags help savelives, they can cause minor injuries,or more serious or even fatalinjuries if occupants are notproperly restrained or sittingproperly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard.



Door Locks

Head Restraints

Seats & Seat-Backs What you should do:Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, rollovers, or minorfrontal or side collisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

What you should do:

10

01/09/28 19:26:12 31SZ3660_013

All adults, and children who haveoutgrown child safety seats, arewearing their seat belts andwearing them properly (see page

).

Any infant or small child isproperly restrained in a child seatin the back seat (see page ).

To make sure you and yourpassengers get the maximumprotection from your car’s safetyfeatures, check the following eachtime before you drive away:

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in severecrashes, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.Head restraints are properly

adjusted (see page ).

All doors are closed and locked(see page ).

Front seat occupants are sittingupright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel anddashboard (see page ).

All cargo is properly stored orsecured (see page ).

Seat-backs are upright (see page).

12

13

14

1215

20 186


Pre-Drive Safety Checklist


11

01/09/28 19:26:22 31SZ3660_014

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver and other adultoccupants.

These instructions also apply tochildren who have outgrown childseats and are large enough to wearlap/shoulder belts. (See page forimportant additional guidelines onhow to properly protect largerchildren.)

For security, locked doors canprevent an outsider fromunexpectedly opening a door whenyou come to a stop.

See page for how to lock thedoors.

After everyone has entered the car,be sure the doors are closed andlocked.

For safety, locking the doors reducesthe chance that a passenger,especially a child, will open a doorwhile the car is moving andaccidentally fall out. It also reducesthe chance of someone being thrownout of the car during a crash.

Any driver who sits too close to thesteering wheel is at risk of beingseriously injured or killed by strikingthe steering wheel or from beingstruck by an inflating front airbagduring a crash.

Your car has a door monitor light onthe instrument panel to indicatewhen a specific door is not tightlyclosed.

35

78


Protecting Adults

Introduction

Close and Lock the Doors

Adjust the Front Seats

1.

2.

12

01/09/28 19:26:35 31SZ3660_015

CONTINUED

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel. If yousit too close to the steering wheel,you could be injured if the frontairbag inflates.

To reduce the chance of injury, wearyour seat belt properly, sit uprightwith your back against the seat, andmove the seat away from thesteering wheel to the farthestdistance that allows you to maintainfull control of the car.

Most shorter drivers can get farenough away from the steeringwheel and still reach the pedals.However, if you are concerned aboutsitting too close, we recommend thatyou investigate whether some typeof adaptive equipment may help.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversadjust the seat so the center of thechest is at least 10 inches away fromthe center of the steering wheel.Also make sure your front seatpassenger moves the seat as far tothe rear as possible.

86


Protecting Adults

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

13

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

01/09/28 19:26:47 31SZ3660_016

Before driving, make sure everyonewith an adjustable head restraint hasproperly positioned the headrestraint. The restraint should bepositioned so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint. A tallerperson should adjust the restraint ashigh as possible.

See page for how to adjust seat-backs.

A front passenger should also adjustthe seat-back to an upright position,but as far from the dashboard aspossible. A passenger who sits tooclose to the dashboard could beinjured if the front airbag inflates.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

87


Protecting Adults

Adjust the Head Restraints4.

14

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position and sit wellback in the seat.

01/09/28 19:26:57 31SZ3660_017

CONTINUED

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Also checkthat the belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

88


Protecting Adults

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

15

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

01/09/28 19:27:05 31SZ3660_018

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack from theshoulder part, then check that thebelt rests across the center of yourchest and over your shoulder. Thisspreads the forces of a crash overthe strongest bones in your upperbody.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

To adjust the height of a front seatbelt anchor, press the release buttonand slide the anchor up or down asneeded (it has four positions).

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Anyone using a seat belt that isnot working properly can beseriously injured or killed. Have yourAcura dealer check the belt as soonas possible.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsystem and how to take care of yourbelts.

40

Protecting Adults


Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one shouldsit in a seat with an inoperative seatbelt.

16

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

01/09/28 19:27:15 31SZ3660_019

Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,so that the wheel points toward yourchest, not toward your face.

See page for how to adjust thesteering wheel.

Pointing the steering wheel towardyour chest provides optimalprotection from the airbag.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thecar is parked and the engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured bystriking interior parts of the car, orby being struck by an inflating frontairbag. Being struck by an inflatingside airbag can result in possiblyserious injuries.

71

CONTINUED

Adjust the Steering Wheel Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6. 7.

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety 17

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

01/09/28 19:27:27 31SZ3660_020

Because protecting the mother is thebest way to protect her unborn child,a pregnant woman should alwayswear a seat belt whenever she drivesor rides in a car.

Pregnant women should also situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard. This will reduce the riskof injuries to both the mother andher unborn child that can be causedby a crash or an inflating airbag.

Each time you have a check-up, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

Remember to keep the lap portion ofthe belt as low as possible acrossyour hips.

Remember, to get the bestprotection from your car’s airbagsand other safety features, you mustsit properly and wear your seat beltproperly.

Advice for Pregnant Women

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety18

01/09/28 19:27:36 31SZ3660_021

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

If yourhands or arms are close to theairbag cover in the center of thesteering wheel or on top of thedashboard, they could be injured ifthe front airbags inflate.

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thecar and hurt someone.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the car and hurtsomeone.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canseverely compromise theprotective capability of the seatbelt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

Additional Safety PrecautionsTwo people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Protecting Adults


01/09/28 19:27:45 31SZ3660_022

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many parents and otheradults may not know how toprotect young passengers. (See page

.)

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be restrainedwhenever they ride in a vehicle.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof death of children ages 12 andunder.

(See page.)

So if you have children, or if you everneed to drive with a grandchild orother children in your car, be sure toread this section.

24

35

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Any child who is too small to wear aseat belt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat.

A larger child should always berestrained with a seat belt.

Protecting Children


Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt.

01/09/28 19:27:55 31SZ3660_023

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in theback seat, not the front seat. TheNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

In the back seat, children are lesslikely to be injured by striking hardinterior parts during a collision orhard braking. Also, children cannotbe injured by an inflating airbagwhen they ride in the back.

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it inflates with tremendousspeed.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, properly restrained with a seatbelt. (See page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren.)

35

CONTINUED

Small Children

Larger ChildrenNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Infants

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Children who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

Children Should Sit in the BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagPoses Serious Risks to Children

Protecting Children


01/09/28 19:28:08 31SZ3660_024

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin the back seat, your car haswarning labels on the dashboard andon the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

To remind you of the front airbaghazards, your car has warning labelson the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

U.S. Models Canadian Models

Protecting Children


01/09/28 19:28:23 31SZ3660_025

Using this feature willprevent children from opening thedoors and accidentally falling out(see page ).

Usingthis feature will prevent childrenfrom playing with the windows,which could expose them tohazards or distract the driver (seepage ).

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards fromthe passenger’s front airbag, andpaying close attention to a childdistracts the driver from theimportant tasks of driving, placingboth of you at risk.

If a child requires physical attentionor frequent visual contact, westrongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear a seat beltproperly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

Your car has three seating positionsin the back seat where children canbe properly restrained.

If you ever have to carry more thanthree children in your car:

12

35

17

15

82

100

CONTINUED

Additional Safety PrecautionsIf a Child Requires CloseAttention

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren Use childproof door locks to

prevent children from opening thedoors.

Use the main power windowswitch to prevent children fromopening the rear windows.

Protecting Children


01/09/28 19:28:38 31SZ3660_026

The following pages give generalguidelines for selecting and installingchild seats for infants and smallchildren.

To provide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

The child seat shouldmeet Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213 (CMVSS 213). Lookfor the manufacturer’s statementof compliance on the box and seat.

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous. Forexample, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Andchildren left alone with the key inthe ignition can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Childrenwho play in cars can accidentallyget trapped inside the trunk.Teach your children not to play inor around cars. Know how tooperate the emergency trunkopener (US models only) anddecide if your children should beshown how to use this feature (seepage ).

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignition,and open the trunk, which canlead to accidental injury or death.

84

Protecting Children


General Guidelines for UsingChild Seats

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet safetystandards.

Do not leave children alone in yourvehicle.

Lock all doors and the trunk whenyour car is not in use.

Keep car keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

1.

24

01/09/28 19:28:46 31SZ3660_027

CONTINUED

Before purchasing a child seat, werecommend that parents test thechild seat in the specific vehicleseating position (or positions) wherethey intend to use the seat. If apreviously purchased child seat doesnot fit, you may need to buy adifferent one that will fit.

Due to variations in the design ofchild seats, vehicle seats, and seatbelts, all child seats will not fit allvehicle seating positions.

However, Acura is confident that oneor more child seat models can fit andbe properly installed in allrecommended seating positions inyour car.A child who is too

large for a rear-facing child seat, andwho can sit up without support,should be restrained in a forward-facing child seat. See page foradditional information on protectingsmall children.

Children up to about oneyear old should be restrained in arear-facing, reclining child seat. Onlya rear-facing seat provides theproper support to protect an infant’shead, neck, and back. See page

for additional information onprotecting infants.

32

28

Protecting Children


The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

Small Children:The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

Infants:

3.

2.

25

01/09/28 19:28:57 31SZ3660_028

If a small child must ride in thefront, follow the instructionsprovided in this section.

This page briefly summarizes Acura’srecommendations on where to placerear-facing and forward-facing childseats in your car.

The passenger’s front airbaginflates with enough force to killor seriously injure an infant in arear-facing child seat.

A small child in a forward-facingchild seat is also at risk. If thevehicle seat is too far forward,or the child’s head is thrownforward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

Never in the front seat, dueto the front airbag hazard.

Not recommended,due to the front airbag hazard. If asmall child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position and secure a front-facing child seat with the seat belt(see page ).

Recommended positions.Secure a rear-facing child seatwith the seat belt (see page ).

Recommendedpositions. Secure a front-facingchild seat with the seat belt (seepage ).

32

28

32

Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s SeatInfants:

Small children:

Back SeatsInfants:

Small children:

Airbags Pose SeriousRisks to Children

Protecting Children


01/09/28 19:29:10 31SZ3660_029

After selecting a proper child seat,and a good position to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be thrown out of the seat in acrash and be seriously injured.

To provide security during normaldriving maneuvers as well as duringa collision, we recommend thatparents secure a child seat as firmlyas possible.

However, a child seat does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehiclesor seating positions, it may bedifficult to install a child seat so thatit does not move at all. Some side-to-side or back-and-forth movement canbe expected and should not reducethe child seat’s effectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly securedin the desired seating position.

When you are not using a child seat,either remove it and store it in a safeplace, or make sure it is properlysecured. An unsecured child seat canbe thrown around the car during acrash or sudden stop and injuresomeone.

All child seatsmust be secured to the car withthe lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.A child whose seat is not properlysecured to the car can beendangered in a crash. See pages

and for instructions on howto secure child seats in this car.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

29 33

Installing a Child Seat Secure the child in the child seat.

Storing a Child Seat

Secure the child seat to the carwith a seat belt.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

1.

2.

3.

Protecting Children


01/09/28 19:29:23 31SZ3660_030

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back. Infants up to aboutone year of age must be restrained ina rear-facing child seat.

In this car, a rear-facing child seatcan be placed in any seating positionin the back seat, but not in the frontseat.

We recommend that an infant berestrained in a rear-facing child seatuntil the infant reaches the seatmaker’s weight or height limit and isable to sit up without support.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If the passenger’sfront airbag inflates, it can hit theback of the child seat with enoughforce to kill or seriously injure aninfant. If an infant must be closelywatched, we recommend thatanother adult sit in the back seatwith the baby.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Rear-Facing Child Seat Placement

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat.

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Protecting Children


Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

01/09/28 19:29:33 31SZ3660_031

With the child seat in the desiredback seating position, route thebelt through the child seataccording to the seat maker’sinstructions, then insert the latchplate into the buckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

The lap/shoulder belts in the backseats have a locking mechanism thatmust be activated to secure a childseat.

The following pages provideinstructions and tips on how tosecure a rear-facing child seat withthis type of seat belt.

1. 2.

3.

CONTINUED

Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation

Protecting Children


01/09/28 19:29:43 31SZ3660_032

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat, whilepulling up on the belt.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

4. 5.

Protecting Children


01/09/28 19:29:50 31SZ3660_033

If you are not wearing a seat beltin a crash, you could be thrownforward into the dashboard andcrush the infant.

If you are wearing a seat belt, theinfant can be torn from your armsduring a crash. For example, ifyour car crashes into a parkedvehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), a20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a600-lb (275 kg) force, and you willnot be able to hold on.

In either case, we recommend thatyou place the child seat directlybehind the front passenger seat,move the front seat as far forward asneeded, and leave it unoccupied. Oryou may wish to get a smaller childseat that allows you to safely carry afront passenger.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front-seat passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended (see page ). Or itmay prevent them from locking theseat-back in the desired uprightposition (see page ).

To achieve the desired recliningangle, it may help to put a rolled uptowel under the toe of the child seat,as shown.

For proper protection, an infant mustride in a reclined, or semi-reclinedposition. To determine the properreclining angle, check with the baby’sdoctor or follow the seat maker’srecommendations.

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into theinfant and cause very seriousinjuries.

12

13

Additional Precautions for InfantsNever hold an infant on your lap.

Rear-Facing Child Seat InstallationTips

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand an infant.

Protecting Children


01/09/28 19:30:00 31SZ3660_034

A child who can sit up withoutsupport, and who fits within the childseat maker’s weight and heightlimits, should be restrained in aforward-facing, upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

We also recommend that a smallchild stay in the child seat as long aspossible, until the child reaches theweight or height limit for the seat.

In this car, the best place to install aforward-facing child seat is in one ofthe seating positions in the back seat.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to causevery serious or fatal injuries. If asmall child must be closely watched,we recommend that another adult sitin the back seat with the child.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the car, and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Protecting Children


Improperly placing a forward-facing child seat in the frontseat can result in serious injuryor death if the front airbagsinflate.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible and properly restrainthe child.

01/09/28 19:30:10 31SZ3660_035

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

The lap/shoulder belts in the backand front passenger seating positionshave a locking mechanism that mustbe activated to secure a child seat.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to secure aforward-facing child seat with thistype of seat belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

1. 2.

3.

CONTINUED

Child Seat Installation

Protecting Children


01/09/28 19:30:20 31SZ3660_036

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure. Itmay help to put weight on thechild seat, or push on the back ofthe seat, while pulling up on thebelt.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism in order to remove achild restraint system, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

4. 5.

Protecting Children


01/09/28 19:30:27 31SZ3660_037

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in the back seat andwear a lap/shoulder belt.

If you are not wearing a seatbelt in a crash, you could bethrown forward into thedashboard and crush the child.

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause very serious injuries.

If you are wearing a seat belt, thechild can be torn from your armsduring a crash. For example, ifyour car crashes into a parkedvehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), a30-lb (14 kg) child will become a900-lb (410 kg) force, and you willnot be able to hold on.

If a child is too short for the shoulderpart of the belt to properly fit, werecommend that the child use abooster seat until the child is tallenough to use the seat belt without abooster.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in the front seat.

CONTINUED

Protecting Larger ChildrenAdditional Precautions for SmallChildren

Never hold a small child on yourlap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Protecting Children


Allowing a larger child to sitimproperly in the front seat canresult in injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must sit in front,make sure the child moves theseat as far back as possibleand wears the seat belt properly.

01/09/28 19:30:38 31SZ3660_038

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt, severelycompromise the protective capabilityof the seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

If they do, they couldbe very seriously injured in a crash.

However, if the belt touches orcrosses the child’s neck, the childneeds to use a booster seat.

This could result inserious neck injuries during a crash.

This could causevery serious injuries during a crash.It also increases the chance that thechild will slide under the belt in acrash and be injured.To determine if a lap/shoulder belt

properly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt. Follow theinstructions on page . Then checkhow the belt fits.

If the shoulder part of the belt restsover the child’s collarbone andagainst the center of the chest, asshown, the child is large enough towear the seat belt.

15

Do not put any accessories on a seatbelt.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the back orunder the arm.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Children


01/09/28 19:30:48 31SZ3660_039

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

The back seat is the safest place fora child of any age or size.

In addition, the passenger’s frontairbag poses serious risks to children.If the seat is too far forward, or thechild’s head is thrown forwardduring a collision, or the child isunrestrained or out of position, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

The side airbag also poses risks. Ifany part of a larger child’s body is inthe path of a deploying airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of the ears areeven with the top of the seat-back. Achild of this height should be tallenough to use the lap/shoulder beltwithout a booster.

Whichever style you select, followthe booster seat maker’s instructions.

If a child needs a booster seat, werecommend choosing a style thatallows the child to use the lap/shoulder belt directly, without ashield, as shown.

CONTINUED

When Can a Larger Child Sit in FrontUsing a Booster Seat

Protecting Children


01/09/28 19:31:00 31SZ3660_040

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in thefront, there are other importantfactors you should consider.

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manualand make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly positioned and secured.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit over the hips, chest, andshoulder (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,the child should not sit in the front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

15 35

Protecting Children


Physical Size

Maturity

38

01/09/28 19:31:10 31SZ3660_041

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchorage point as shown inthe illustration, then tighten thestrap according to the child seatmaker’s instructions. Make sure thestrap is not twisted.

Your car has three tether anchoragepoints under the rear window forsecuring a tether-style child seat tothe car.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

Protecting Children


Using Child Seats with Tethers

39

01/09/28 19:31:18 31SZ3660_042

This seat belt has a single belt thatgoes over your shoulder, across yourchest and across your hips.

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched.

Guide the belt across your body tothe door pillar. After exiting the car,be sure the belt is out of the way andwill not get closed in the door.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belts in all seating positionsexcept the driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat. (Seepages and for instructions onhow to secure child seats with thistype of seat belt.)

The seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your belts.If the driver’s seat belt is notfastened before the ignition is turnedON (II), the light will come on and abeeper will also sound. The beeperwill stop after a few seconds, but thelight will stay on until the driver’sseat belt is fastened.

29 33


Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt

40

01/09/28 19:31:29 31SZ3660_043

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the belt, pull it out only asfar as needed.

See page for instructions on howto wear the lap/shoulder beltproperly. For added protection, the front seat

belts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

The tensioners are designed toactivate primarily in frontal collisions.The tensioners are independent ofthe airbag system, so they can beactivated during a collision that

might not cause the airbags todeploy. In this case, the airbagswould not be needed but theadditional seat belt tension can behelpful.

The tensioners will be activated in acollision severe enough to cause thefront airbags to inflate.

The SRS indicator light willcome on if there is a

problem with your automatic seatbelt tensioners (see page ).

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalway.

45

15



Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

41

01/09/28 19:31:39 31SZ3660_044

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthat the lap/shoulder belts retracteasily. Any belt not in good conditionor not working properly will notprovide good protection and shouldbe replaced as soon as possible.

Acura provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts. Acura will repair orreplace any seat belt componentthat fails to function properlyduring normal use. Please seeyourbooklet for details.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed.

Automatic seat belt tensioners thatdeployed during a crash must bereplaced.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page .277

Acura Warranty Information



Seat Belt Maintenance

U.S. Models

42

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

01/09/28 19:31:49 31SZ3660_045

Your Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) includes:

An indicator light on theinstrument panel that alerts you toa possible problem with thesystem (see page ).

Two front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG.’’

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe frontalcollision.

Automatic seat belt tensioners(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour car’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, the sensorswill detect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration. If the rate ofdeceleration is high enough, thecontrol unit will instantly inflate thefront airbags.

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, and driver andpassenger seat belt use when theignition is ON (II).

45

41

CONTINUED

SRS Components How Your Front Airbags Work


Additional Information About Your Airbags

43

01/09/28 19:32:01 31SZ3660_046

The total time for inflation anddeflation is approximately one-tenthof a second, so fast that mostoccupants are not aware that theairbags deployed until they see themlying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe car as soon as it is safe to do so.

For additional information on howyour airbags work, see the booklettitled

that came with yourowner’s manual.

Since both airbags use the samesensors, both airbags normallyinflate at the same time. However, itis possible for only one airbag toinflate.

This can occur when the severity ofa collision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

For additional information on howyour airbags work, ask your dealerfor a copy of the booklet titled

During a frontal crash, your seatbelts help restrain your lower bodyand torso. Your airbag provides acushion to help restrain and protectyour head and chest.

SRS: What You Need to KnowAbout Airbags

SRS:What You Need to Know About Airbags.

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners



44

01/09/28 19:32:12 31SZ3660_047

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Your car is equipped with sideairbags for the driver and a frontseat passenger. The airbags arestored in the outer edges of the frontseat-backs, and both are marked‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, the sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.


How Your Side Airbags Work


45

01/09/28 19:32:19 31SZ3660_048

If the light comes on at any othertime, or does not come on at all, youshould have the system checked byyour dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator light does notcome on after you turn the ignitionON (II).

If the light stays on after theengine starts.

If the light comes on or flashes onand off while you drive.

The purpose of the SRSindicator light is to alert

you to a potential problem with yourfront airbags. This light will alsoalert you to a potential problem withyour automatic seat belt tensioners(page ); or your side airbags orpassenger’s side airbag automaticcutoff system (page ).

When you turn the ignition ON (II),this indicator will light briefly thengo out. This tells you that the systemis working properly. If you see any of these indications,

your front or side airbags may notdeploy, your passenger’s side airbagautomatic cutoff system may notwork properly, or your seat belttensioners may not work when youneed them. See your Acura dealer assoon as possible.

41

45

How the SRS Indicator LightWorks



46

Ignoring the SRS indicator lightcan result in serious injury ordeath if the airbags, cutoffsystem, or tensioners do notwork properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS light alerts you to apotential problem.

01/09/28 19:32:29 31SZ3660_049

This light alerts you thatthe passenger’s side airbag

has been automatically shut off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

If a small-statured adult leanssideways, or larger adult slouchesand leans sideways into thedeployment path of the side airbag,the system may also shut off the sideairbag.

If the side airbag indicator lightcomes on, you should have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the deploymentpath of the side airbag, the systemwill turn the airbag back on and thelight will go out.

When you turn the ignition ON (II),the indicator should light briefly andgo out (see page ). If it doesn’tlight, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.

To reduce the risk of injury from aninflating side airbag, your car has anautomatic cutoff system for thepassenger’s side airbag.

Although Acura does not encouragechildren to ride in the front seat, thissystem is designed to shut off theside airbag if a child leans sidewaysand the child’s head is in the sideairbag deployment path.

55


How The Side Airbag IndicatorLight Works


47

01/09/28 19:32:39 31SZ3660_050

Your front and side airbag systemsare virtually maintenance-free, andthere are no parts you can safelyservice. However, you must haveyour car serviced if:

Anyairbag that has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Donot try to remove or replace anyairbag by yourself. This must bedone by an Acura dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

See page for further informationand precautions relating to yourairbags.

Improperlyreplacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your sideairbags from inflating during acollision.

If rain or spilled watersoaks into a seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag systemfrom working properly.

Take your car to anauthorized Acura dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, the airbags might notinflate when you need them.

185


Airbag Service Additional Safety Precautions

Your airbags ever inflate.

Do not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consulting anAcura dealer.

Do not expose the front seat-backsto water.

The SRS indicator light alerts youto a problem.


01/09/28 19:32:49 31SZ3660_051

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

If you must sit in your parked car,even in an unconfined area, with theengine running, adjust the climatecontrol system as follows:

Your car’s exhaust contains carbonmonoxide gas. You should have noproblem with carbon monoxideentering the car in normal driving ifyou maintain your car properly.Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The car is raised for an oil change.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The car was in an accident thatmay have damaged the underside.

Select the Fresh Air mode.Select the mode.Set the fan speed to high.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

With the trunk lid open, air flow canpull exhaust gas into your car’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk lid open, open all the windowsand set the climate control system asshown below.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard


Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

01/09/28 19:32:59 31SZ3660_052

＊

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read, contact your Acura dealerfor a replacement.

U.S. models only

U.S. models Canadian models


Safety Labels

50

RADIATOR CAP

SUN VISOR

HOOD

DASHBOARD

The U.S. car model

01/09/28 19:33:16 31SZ3660_053

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour Acura. All the essential controlsare within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 52...............................Indicator Lights . 53

.............................................Gauges . 58...............................Speedometer . 58

.................................Tachometer . 58.....................................Odometer . 59

Trip Meter/Outside...........Temperature Indicator . 59

...................Temperature Gauge . 60..................................Fuel Gauge . 60

Maintenance Required...................................Indicator . 61

Controls Near the Steering.......................................Wheel . 62

...................................Headlights . 63....................Automatic Lighting . 64

............Daytime Running Lights . 65....Instrument Panel Brightness . 66

................................Turn Signals . 66...................................Fog Lights . 67

.....................Windshield Wipers . 68..................Windshield Washers . 70

..........................Hazard Warning . 70.............Rear Window Defogger . 71

....Steering Wheel Adjustments . 71...............................Keys and Locks . 74

..............................................Keys . 74....................Immobilizer System . 75

............................Ignition Switch . 77......................Power Door Locks . 78

...................Remote Transmitter . 79..............Childproof Door Locks . 82

...........................................Trunk . 83........Emergency Trunk Opener . 84

....................................Glove Box . 85............................Seat Adjustments . 86

.........Driver’s Seat Adjustments . 86...........Driver’s Lumbar Support . 88

Front Passenger’s Seat............................Adjustments . 88..........................Head Restraints . 88

............................................Armrest . 89.............................................Mirrors . 91

....Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 91Driving Position Memory

..........................................System . 93....................................Seat Heaters . 95

.........................................Ski Sleeve . 96..............................Power Windows . 98

.......................................Moonroof . 100...............................Parking Brake . 102

..................................Digital Clock . 102........................Sunglasses Holder . 104

...........................Beverage Holder . 105.................Console Compartment . 106

........................................Coin Box . 106

........................................Sun Visor . 107................................Vanity Mirror . 107

.............Accessory Power Socket . 108..........................Cigarette Lighter . 109

.........................................Ashtrays . 110................................Ceiling Lights . 111

............................Courtesy Lights . 112

Instruments and Controls

Instruments and Controls 51

01/09/28 19:33:22 31SZ3660_054

Control Locations

Instruments and Controls52

DDRRIIVVIINNGG PPOOSSIITTIIOONNMMEEMMOORRYY

PPOOWWEERR WWIINNDDOOWWSSWWIITTCCHHEESS

DDIIGGIITTAALL CCLLOOCCKK

AAUUDDIIOO SSYYSSTTEEMM

MMIIRRRROORRCCOONNTTRROOLLSS

CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLLSSYYSSTTEEMM

HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE

TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEEBBUUTTTTOONN

FFUUEELL FFIILLLLDDOOOORR RREELLEEAASSEEHHAANNDDLLEE

DDOOOORR LLOOCCKKSSWWIITTCCHHEESS((PP.. 7788))

((PP.. 9933))

((PP.. 9988))

((PP.. 8833))

((PP.. 117799))

((PP.. 9911))((PP.. 110022))

((PP.. 118800))

((PP.. 111144))

((PP.. 112288))

01/09/28 19:33:28 31SZ3660_055

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊ The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Indicator Lights


DDOOOORR AANNDD BBRRAAKKEELLAAMMPP MMOONNIITTOORR

VVSSAA AACCTTIIVVAATTIIOONNIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

VVEEHHIICCLLEE SSTTAABBIILLIITTYY AASSSSIISSTTSSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

AANNTTII--LLOOCCKK BBRRAAKKEESSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR((PP..5555))

((PP..5566))

((PP..5555))

((PP..5555)) ((PP..5555))

((PP..5566))

((PP..5566))

((PP..5544))((PP..5544))

((PP..5577)) ((PP..5544))

HHIIGGHH BBEEAAMMIINNDDIICCAATTOORR((PP..5577))

IIMMMMOOBBIILLIIZZEERRSSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR((PP..5555))

((PP..5544))

SSEEAATT BBEELLTTRREEMMIINNDDEERRLLIIGGHHTT

LLOOWW FFUUEELLIINNDDIICCAATTOORR((PP..5577))

LLOOWW OOIILLPPRREESSSSUURREEIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMMIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALLRREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMMIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSIIDDEE AAIIRRBBAAGGIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL IINNDDIICCAATTOORRPPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE AANNDDBBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMMIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

LLIIGGHHTTSS OONNIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONNIINNDDIICCAATTOORRLLAAMMPP((PP..229977))

01/09/28 19:33:36 31SZ3660_056

The engine can be severely damagedif this light flashes or stays on whenthe engine is running. For completeinformation, see page .

If this light comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For completeinformation, see page .

This light has two functions:

If you do not fasten your seat belt,the beeper will stop after a fewseconds but the light stays on untilyou do. Both the light and the beeperstay off if you fasten your seat beltbefore turning on the ignition.

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to you and your passengersto protect yourselves by fasteningthe seat belts. A beeper also soundsif you have not fastened your seatbelt.

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your car.

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch ON (II). Itis a reminder to check the parkingbrake. Driving with the parkingbrake not fully released candamage the brakes and tires.

If the indicator remains lit afteryou have fully released theparking brake while the engine isrunning, or if it comes on whiledriving, it can indicate a problemin the brake system. For completeinformation, see page .

1.

2.

295

296

299

Indicator Lights


Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicatorSeat Belt Reminder Light

54

U.S. Canada

01/09/28 19:33:49 31SZ3660_057

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

See page .

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This light willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff systemor automatic seat belt tensioners.For complete information, see page

.

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For complete information, see page

.

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0) without turning off thelight switch, this indicator willremain on. A reminder chime willalso sound when you open the driver’sdoor.

This indicator will also come onwhen the light switch is in AUTOand the lights turn on automatically.

This lights when you set the cruisecontrol. See page for informationon operating the cruise control.

45

47

75

297

158

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Side Airbag Indicator

Lights On Indicator(U.S. models only)

Cruise Control Indicator

Indicator Lights


01/09/28 19:34:05 31SZ3660_058

This light normally comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If this light comes on atany other time, there is a problem inthe ABS. If this happens, take thecar to your dealer to have it checked.With the light on, your car still hasnormal braking ability but no anti-lock. For complete information, seepage .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II). It comes on as a reminder that you

have turned off the VehicleStability Assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

If this light comes on and stays on atany other time, or it does not comeon when you turn the ignition switchON (II), there is a problem with theVSA system. Take the car to yourdealer to have it checked. WithoutVSA, your car still has normaldriving ability, but will not have VSAtraction and stability enhancement.See page for more informationon the VSA system.

This indicator has three functions:

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II). See page

for more information on theVSA system.

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

1.

2.

3.

201

201

199201


Indicator Lights

Anti-lock BrakeSystem (ABS)Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator

56

U.S. Canada

01/09/28 19:34:18 31SZ3660_059

This light comes on with the highbeam headlights. See page forinformation on the headlightcontrols.

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the Daytime Running Lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) withthe headlight switch off and theparking brake set. It should go off ifyou turn on the headlights or releasethe parking brake. If it comes on atany other time, it means there is aproblem with the DRL. There mayalso be a problem with the highbeam headlights.

The left or right turn signal lightblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the light does not blink orblinks rapidly, it usually means oneof the turn signal bulbs is burned out(see page ). Replace the bulb assoon as possible, since other driverscannot see that you are signalling.

When you turn on the HazardWarning switch, both turn signallights blink. All turn signals on theoutside of the vehicle should flash.

This light comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.

All the lights in the monitor displaycome on for a few seconds when youturn the ignition switch ON (II).

A burned out brake light is a hazardwhen drivers behind you cannot tellyou are braking. Have your brakelights repaired right away.

The appropriate light comes on inthis display if the trunk or any dooris not closed tightly. If a brake lightdoes not work, theindicator comes on when you pushthe brake pedal with the ignitionswitch ON (II).

63

65

260

Canadian models only

High Beam Indicator

‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Low Fuel Indicator

Door and Brake Lamp Monitor

Indicator Lights


BRAKE LAMP

01/09/28 19:34:32 31SZ3660_060

U.S. Models

Canadian Models

This shows your speed in miles perhour (mph). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in kilometersper hour (km/h).

This shows your speed in kilometersper hour (km/h). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in miles perhour (mph).

The tachometer shows the enginespeed in revolutions per minute(rpm). To protect the engine fromdamage, never drive with thetachometer needle in the red zone.

The gauges illuminate when youturn the ignition switch ON (II).

Gauges

Speedometer

Tachometer


TTAACCHHOOMMEETTEERR TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREEGGAAUUGGEE

SSEELLEECCTTBBUUTTTTOONN

OODDOOMMEETTEERR

RREESSEETTBBUUTTTTOONN

FFUUEELL GGAAUUGGEE

MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEERREEQQUUIIRREEDD IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

TTRRIIPP MMEETTEERR//OOUUTTSSIIDDEETTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSPPEEEEDDOOMMEETTEERR

01/09/28 19:34:44 31SZ3660_061

CONTINUED

The trip meter and the outsidetemperature indicator use the samedisplay. To switch the displaybetween the trip meter and theoutside temperature, press theSelect button. When you turn theignition switch to ON (II), what youlast selected is displayed.

The trip meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

There are two trip meters, Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between theseand the outside temperature displayby pressing the Select buttonrepeatedly. Each trip meter worksindependently, so you can keep trackof two different distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it andthen press the Reset button until youhear a beep. Both trip meters will re-set if the car’s battery goes dead oris disconnected.

The odometer shows the total dis-tance your car has been driven. Itmeasures miles in U.S. models andkilometers in Canadian models.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

Gauges


Odometer Trip Meter/Outside TemperatureIndicator

Trip Meter

59



01/09/28 19:34:54 31SZ3660_062

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise to nearthe upper white mark. If it reachesthe red (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit in U.S.models, and in Centigrade inCanadian models.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

The temperature sensor is located inthe front bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the road sur-face, engine heat, and the exhaustfrom the surrounding traffic. Thiscan cause the temperature readingnot to be correct when your speed isunder 19 mph (30 km/h).

This shows how much fuel you have.It is most accurate when the car is onlevel ground. It may show slightlymore or less than the actual amountwhen you are driving on curvy orhilly roads.

The gauge stays at the same fuellevel reading after you turn off theignition. When you add fuel, thegauge slowly changes to the newreading after you turn the ignitionswitch back ON (II).

293

Gauges


Fuel GaugeTemperature GaugeOutside Temperature Indicator

60

01/09/28 19:35:05 31SZ3660_063

－

Your dealer will reset this indicatorafter completing the scheduledmaintenance. If this maintenance isdone by someone other than yourAcura dealer, reset the indicator asfollows.

Turn off the engine.

For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on fortwo seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II).

Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and7,500 miles (12,000 km) thisindicator will light for two secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch ON (II), and then flash forten seconds.

Press and hold the select and resetbuttons next to the instrument pan-el, then turn the ignition switchON (II).

Hold the buttons forapproximately ten seconds untilthe indicator resets.

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your car in forscheduled maintenance.

If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedulesfor Normal and Severe DrivingConditions on pages .

1.

2.

3.

218 222

Gauges


Maintenance Required Indicator

61



MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE RREEQQUUIIRREEDD IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/09/28 19:35:16 31SZ3660_064

The two levers on the steeringcolumn contain controls for drivingfeatures you use most often. The leftlever controls the turn signals,headlights, and high beams. Theright lever controls the windshieldwashers and wipers.

The switch for the hazard warninglights is on the dashboard to theright of the steering column.

The controls under the left air ventare for the cruise control, instrumentpanel brightness and the VSASystem.

The switches for the rear windowdefogger and fog lights are underthe audio system.

The steering wheel adjustmentswitch on the side of the steeringcolumn allows you to tilt andtelescope the steering wheel.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel


CCRRUUIISSEECCOONNTTRROOLL

HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTTSS//TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALLSS

IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTTPPAANNEELLBBRRIIGGHHTTNNEESSSS

HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGGLLIIGGHHTTSS

WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDDWWIIPPEERRSS//WWAASSHHEERRSS

FFOOGGLLIIGGHHTTSS

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWWDDEEFFOOGGGGEERR

VVEEHHIICCLLEESSTTAABBIILLIITTYYAASSSSIISSTT SSYYSSTTEEMMOOFFFF SSWWIITTCCHH

SSTTEEEERRIINNGG WWHHEEEELLAADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTTSS

HHOORRNN

01/09/28 19:35:25 31SZ3660_065

CONTINUED

To change between low beams andhigh beams, pull the turn signal leveruntil you hear a click, then let go.The blue high beam indicator willlight (see page ).

The rotating switch on the left levercontrols the lights. Turning thisswitch to the position turns onthe parking lights, taillights, sidemarker lights, and rear license platelights. Turning the switch to the

position turns on theheadlights.

When the light switch is in either ofthese positions, the Lights Onindicator comes on as a reminder.This light remains on if you leave thelight switch on and turn the ignitionswitch to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK(0).

If you leave the lights on with theignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0), you will hear areminder chime when you open thedriver’s door.

57

U.S. models only

Headlights



01/09/28 19:35:35 31SZ3660_066

The high beams will stay on for aslong as you hold the lever back, nomatter what position the headlightswitch is in.

To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever back lightly, thenrelease it. The high beams will comeon and go off.

The Automatic Lighting featureturns on the headlights, all otherexterior lights, and the instrumentpanel lights when it senses lowambient light.

To turn on automatic lighting, turnthe light switch to AUTO at any time.The lights will come on automaticallywhen the outside light level becomeslow (at dusk, for example). The

Lights On indicator comes on as areminder. The lights and indicatorwill turn off automatically when thesystem senses high ambient light.

The lights will remain on when youturn off the ignition switch. They willturn off automatically when you openthe driver’s door. To turn them onagain, either turn the ignition switchto ON (II) or turn the light switch to

.

Even with the automatic lightingfeature turned on, we recommendthat you turn on the lights manuallywhen driving at night or in a densefog, or when you enter dark areas,such as long tunnels or parkingstructures.

On U.S. models

Automatic Lighting



AAUUTTOO PPOOSSIITTIIOONN

01/09/28 19:35:44 31SZ3660_067

The automatic lighting feature iscontrolled by a sensor located on topof the dashboard. Do not cover thissensor or spill liquids on it.

With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) andrelease the parking brake. Theyremain on until you turn the ignitionoff, even if you set the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

Do not leave the light switch inAUTO if you will not be driving thecar for an extended period (a weekor more). You should also turn offthe lights if you plan to leave theengine idling or the engine off for along time. This will prevent thebattery from discharging.



Daytime Running Lights(Canadian Models)

65

LLIIGGHHTTSSEENNSSOORR

01/09/28 19:35:52 31SZ3660_068

The dial on the dashboard to the leftof the instrument panel is used toadjust the brightness of the lights inthe controls and displays. Turn thedial to adjust the brightness.

Signal a turn or lane change with thislever. Push down on the lever tosignal a left turn, and up to signal aright turn. If you push it up or downall the way, the turn signal continuesto blink even when you release thelever. It shuts off automatically asyou complete the turn.

To reduce glare at night, the instru-ment panel illumination dims whenyou turn the light switch to or

. Turning the instrument panelbrightness control fully to the left,past the detent, will return the instru-ment panel to its full brightness.

Instrument Panel Brightness Turn Signals



TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL LLEEVVEERR

IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELLBBRRIIGGHHTTNNEESSSS DDIIAALL

01/09/28 19:36:01 31SZ3660_069

Turn the fog lights on and off bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button lights to show the foglights are on.

To signal a lane change, push lightlyon the turn signal lever in the properdirection and hold it. The lever willreturn to the center position as soonas you release it.

You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.They will go off when you turn theheadlights off or onto high beam.

With the light switch in the AUTOposition, you can also use the foglights when the headlights turn onautomatically. They will go off whenthe headlights turn off.

U.S. models only



Fog Lights

67

CCaarrss wwiitthh nnaavviiggaattiioonn ssyysstteemm

01/09/28 19:36:09 31SZ3660_070

The right lever controls the wind-shield wipers and washers. Therotary switch at the end of the leverhas three positions:

INT: intermittent: low speed: high speed

In intermittent, the wipers operateevery few seconds. The sweepinterval will change slightly withspeed; getting shorter as you drivefaster. In low speed and high speed,the wipers run continuously.

You can vary how often the wiperssweep the windshield by turning theINT TIME ring next to the rotaryswitch.

If you turn the INT TIME ring to theshortest delay, the wipers willchange from intermittent to lowspeed operation when vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

Windshield Wipers



01/09/28 19:36:18 31SZ3660_071

Adjust the wiper arms to the winterposition by grasping either arm nearthe pivot. Pull on the arm, parallel tothe windshield, until it locks in thehigher position. Push the arm in theother direction to return the wipersto the summer position.

To operate the wipers in mist mode,push the control lever down. Thewipers run at high speed until yourelease the lever. This gives you aquick way to clear the windshield.

The windshield wiper arms have twoparked positions: Winter andSummer. In the winter position, thearms sit slightly above the edge ofthe hood. This reduces the possibili-ty of damage to the wiper arms orwindshield wiper motor by a build-upof snow and ice.

A heavy build-up of snow or ice onthe wiper arms will cause them toautomatically park in the winterposition.


Wiper Arms Winter Position


WWIIPPEERR AARRMMSS

01/09/28 19:36:26 31SZ3660_072

To clean the windshield, pull back onthe wiper control lever. The washersspray until you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed while you’repulling the lever, then complete onemore sweep of the windshield afteryou release it.

Push the red button to turn on thehazard warning lights (four-wayflashers). This causes all fouroutside turn signals and bothindicators in the instrument panel toflash. Use the hazard warning lightsif you need to park in a dangerousarea near heavy traffic, or if your caris disabled.



Windshield Washers Hazard Warning

70


01/09/28 19:36:34 31SZ3660_073

CONTINUED

See page for important safetyinformation about how to properlyposition the steering wheel.

17

Your Acura’s steering wheel iselectrically-adjustable for angle anddistance. The adjustment switch ison the left side of the steeringcolumn. Always adjust the steeringwheel before you begin driving.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe sideto side.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The light in thebutton lights to show the defogger ison. If you do not turn it off, thedefogger will shut itself off afterabout 25 minutes. It also shuts offwhen you turn off the ignition. Youhave to turn it on again when yourestart the car.



Steering Wheel AdjustmentsRear Window Defogger

71


Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thecar and be seriously injured in acrash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the car is stopped.

01/09/28 19:36:44 31SZ3660_074

The AUTO switch controls automat-ic movement of the steering wheel.When this switch is in the ON posi-tion, the steering wheel automatical-ly moves fully in and up when you re-move the key from the ignitionswitch.

Release the switch when thesteering wheel reaches thedesired position. Make sure thesteering wheel points towardsyour chest, not toward your face,and that you can see theinstrument panel gauges andwarning lights.

Locate the adjustment switch onthe left side of the steering column.Move the steering wheel, in, out,up, or down by pushing andholding the adjustment switch inthat direction.

2.1.



Automatic Movement

72

AAUUTTOO SSWWIITTCCHH

01/09/28 19:36:53 31SZ3660_075

The steering wheel then returns toits original position when you insertthe key back in the ignition switch.

Steering wheel movement is alsocontrolled by the Driving PositionMemory System (see page ).93



73

01/09/28 19:36:58 31SZ3660_076

Your car comes with two masterkeys and a valet key.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theImmobilizer System. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry them immedi-ately with a soft cloth.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

The master key fits all the locks onyour car:• Ignition• Doors• Trunk• Trunk pass-through cover• Glove box

The valet key works only in theignition and the door locks. You cankeep the trunk, trunk pass-throughcover, and glove box locked whenyou leave your car and the valet keyat a parking facility.

You should have received a keynumber plate with your keys. Youwill need this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Keepthe plate stored in a safe place. If you

need to replace a key, use only anAcura-approved key blank.

Keys

Keys and Locks


KKEEYYNNUUMMBBEERRPPLLAATTEE

VVAALLEETTKKEEYY((GGrraayy))

MMAASSTTEERRKKEEYYSS((BBllaacckk))

01/09/28 19:37:09 31SZ3660_077

Your car also comes with two remotetransmitters; see page for anexplanation of the operation.

You should also receive a small casecontaining a learning key. It is usedby the Acura dealer to code replace-ment keys to your car’s ImmobilizerSystem. It must not be used in yourcar’s ignition switch. Store the learn-ing key with the key number plate ina safe place. If you attempt to use the learning

key to start your car’s engine, it maycause a malfunction in the systemthat makes your master and valetkeys unusable. If this happens, youshould contact your Acura dealer.

If you need a new key made, take thekey number plate, the learning key,and all other keys that came withyour car to your Acura dealer.

The Immobilizer System protectsyour car from theft. A properly-coded master or valet key must beused in the ignition switch for theengine to start. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used,the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the Immobilizer Systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

79

CONTINUED

Remote Transmitter

Learning Key

Immobilizer System

Keys and Locks


01/09/28 19:37:20 31SZ3660_078

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object is near theignition switch when you insert thekey. To make sure the systemrecognizes the key code: If you have lost your key and you

cannot start the engine, contact yourAcura dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour car undriveable.

Do not keep other immobilizerkeys on the same key ring.

Use a plastic or leather key fob,not metal.

Keep other keys away from yourvehicle’s key and the ignitionswitch while trying to start theengine.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your Acura dealer.

The Immobilizer System indicatorwill also blink several times whenyou turn the ignition switch from ON(II) to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).

Keys and Locks


01/09/28 19:37:30 31SZ3660_079

－

－

－

－

The ignition switch is on the rightside of the steering column. It hasfour positions:• LOCK (0)• ACCESSORY (I)• ON (II)• START (III)

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may sometimes makeit difficult to turn the key fromLOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turnthe steering wheel to the left or tothe right as you turn the key.

In this position,you can operate the audio systemand the cigarette lighter.

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To switch from ACCESSORY toLOCK, you must push the key inslightly as you turn it. The shift levermust also be in Park. The anti-theftlock will lock the steering columnwhen you remove the key.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. All featuresand accessories on the car are usable.Several of the lights on the instru-ment panel come on as a test whenyou turn the ignition switch from

ACCESSORY to ON.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

The engine will not start if theImmobilizer System does notrecognize the key’s coding (see page

).

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

69

Ignition Switch

ACCESSORY (I)

LOCK (0)

ON (II)

START (III)

Keys and Locks


01/09/28 19:37:41 31SZ3660_080

Each front door has a master doorlock switch. Either switch locks andunlocks all doors. Push the switchdown to lock all doors, and up tounlock them.

Each door has a lock tab at the top ofthe door. When you push down thelock tab on the driver’s door, alldoors lock. Pulling up the lock tab onthe driver’s door only unlocks thatdoor. The lock tab on eachpassenger’s door only locks andunlocks that door.

To lock any passenger’s door whengetting out of the car, push the locktab down and close the door. To lockthe driver’s door, remove the keyfrom the ignition switch and pushthe lock tab down or push the masterswitch down, then close the door.

All doors can be locked from theoutside by using the key in eitherfront door. To unlock only the driver’sdoor from the outside, insert the keyin the driver’s door lock, turn the keyand release it. If you turn the keyand hold it, all doors will unlock. Allfour doors will unlock when youunlock the passenger’s door with thekey.

Power Door Locks

Keys and Locks


MMAASSTTEERR DDOOOORR LLOOCCKK SSWWIITTCCHH LLOOCCKK TTAABB

01/09/28 19:37:50 31SZ3660_081

If you forget and leave the key in theignition switch, Lockout Preventionwill not allow you to lock the driver’sdoor. With the driver’s door openand the key in the ignition, bothmaster door lock switches aredisabled. However, if the driver’sdoor is not open, the master doorlock switches are not disabled.Pushing the switch down on theopen passenger’s door will lock alldoors. If you try to lock an opendriver’s door by pushing in the locktab, the tabs on all doors pop out.Pushing in the lock tab on thepassenger’s door only locks that door.

The ceiling lights (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the center position) andthe door courtesy lights will come onwhen you press the UNLOCK button.If you do not open any door, thelights stay on for about 10 seconds,then fade out. If you relock the doorswith the remote transmitter before10 seconds have elapsed, the lightswill go off immediately.

You can lock and unlock your carwith the remote transmitter. Whenyou push the LOCK button, all doorslock. You will hear a beep, and theparking lights, taillights and licenseplate lights will flash once.

When you push the UNLOCK buttononce, only the driver’s door unlocks.The remaining doors unlock whenyou push the button a second time.You will hear two beeps, and theoutside lights will flash twice, eachtime you push the button.

CONTINUED

Remote TransmitterLockout Prevention

Keys and Locks


LLEEDD

UUNNLLOOCCKKBBUUTTTTOONN

LLOOCCKKBBUUTTTTOONN

TTRRUUNNKKRREELLEEAASSEEBBUUTTTTOONN

PPAANNIICCBBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:38:00 31SZ3660_082

If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany of the doors within 30 seconds,the doors automatically relock andthe security system sets.

You cannot lock any of the doorswith the remote transmitter if anydoor is not fully closed or the key isin the ignition switch. You cannotunlock any of the doors with the keyin the ignition switch.

To open the trunk, push the TrunkRelease button for approximatelyone second.

You can open the trunk with theremote transmitter regardless of theposition of the main switch in theglove box. The trunk will not open ifthe key is in the ignition switch.

You can program the keyless entrysystem so it does not beep when youlock and unlock the doors. Thisprocedure only turns off the beep;the exterior lights will still flash.

To turn this feature off, stand nearthe car with the remote transmitter.Press and hold the Trunk Releasebutton, then press the Lock buttonwithin one second. You should seethe LED on the remote transmittercome on for one second. Release thebuttons after the LED goes out.

To turn this feature on, repeat theabove procedure. You should see theLED blink twice.

After you program the remotetransmitter, make sure the trunk lidis closed.

Panic mode allows you to remotelyactivate your car’s security system toattract attention. When activated, thehorn will sound, and the exteriorlights will flash, for about 30 seconds.To activate panic mode, press andhold the PANIC button for about twoseconds.

To cancel Panic mode before 30seconds, press any button on theremote transmitter. You can alsoturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Panic mode will not activate if theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

Turning the Beep Off and On Panic Mode

Keys and Locks


01/09/28 19:38:11 31SZ3660_083

＋

CONTINUED

When the remote transmitter’sbattery begins to get weak, it maytake several pushes on the button tolock or unlock the doors and thetailgate, and the LED will get dim.Replace the battery as soon aspossible.

Battery type: CR2025

To replace the battery, place a clothon the edge of the transmitter andremove the upper half by carefullyprying on the edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver.

Remove the old battery and note thepolarity. Make sure the polarity ofthe new battery is the same ( sidefacing up), then insert it in thetransmitter.

Snap the two halves of thetransmitter case back together.

Replacing the Battery

Keys and Locks


01/09/28 19:38:21 31SZ3660_084

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up and use the outside doorhandle.

Avoid severe shock to the trans-mitter, such as dropping or throwingit. Also, protect it from extreme hotor cold temperatures.

Clean the transmitter case with asoft cloth. Do not use strongcleaners or solvents that could harmthe case. Immersing the transmitterin any liquid will harm the trans-mitter and cause it to not functionproperly.

If you lose a transmitter, you willneed to have the replacementprogrammed to your car’s system byyour Acura dealer. Any othertransmitters you have will also needto be reprogrammed.




Childproof Door Locks

Keys and Locks


Transmitter Care

82

LLEEVVEERR

01/09/28 19:38:32 31SZ3660_085

You can open the trunk in threeways:

To protect items in the trunk whenyou need to give the key to someoneelse:

Disable the trunk release buttonon the driver’s door by turning offthe trunk main switch in the glovebox.

Press the trunk release button onthe driver’s door.Use the master key to open thetrunk lock. The valet key does notwork in this lock.Press and hold the trunk releasebutton on the remote transmitterfor approximately one second (seepage ).

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

See page for cargo loading andweight limit information. Keep thetrunk lid closed at all times whiledriving to avoid damaging the lid,and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

on page .

1.

49

79

186

CONTINUED

Trunk

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

Keys and Locks


MMAASSTTEERR KKEEYY

TTRRUUNNKK MMAAIINN SSWWIITTCCHHTTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:38:47 31SZ3660_086

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature.

For more information about childsafety, see page .

Make sure the trunk pass-throughcover is locked (see page ).

Lock the glove box with themaster key.

Give the person the valet key.

Even if the trunk main switch isturned off, you can open the trunkwith the master key or the remotetransmitter.

To open the trunk, push the releaselever to the left.

As a safety feature, your car has arelease lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from theinside.

24

2.

3.

4.

90

Emergency Trunk Opener(U.S. models only)

Keys and Locks


01/09/28 19:38:58 31SZ3660_087

The glove box light comes on onlywhen the parking lights are on.

Open the glove box by pulling thebottom of the handle. Close it with afirm push. Lock or unlock the glovebox with the master key.

Glove Box

Keys and Locks


An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

01/09/28 19:39:05 31SZ3660_088

－

Pull up or push down on the front ofthe switch to move the seat bottom’sfront edge up or down. Pull up orpush down on the rear of the switchto move the rear of the seat bottomup or down.Push the horizontal switch forward

or backward to move the seatforward or backward.

The long horizontal switch adjuststhe seat bottom in several directions.The short vertical switch adjusts theseat-back angle.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

Your Acura has power adjustmentsfor both front seats. The two powerseat adjustment switches are on theoutside edge of the seat bottom.

You can adjust the power seats withthe ignition switch in any position.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

12 14 Driver’s Seat Adjustments

Seat Adjustments


01/09/28 19:39:16 31SZ3660_089

The driver’s seat includes a memoryfeature. Two seat positions can bestored in separate memories. Youcan then select a memorized positionby pushing the appropriate memorybutton. Refer to page for how tomemorize and select the seatpositions.

Pull the center of the horizontalswitch up to raise the seat. Push itdown to lower the seat.

Adjust the seat-back angle bypushing the rear switch in thedirection you want to move.

93

Seat Adjustments


01/09/28 19:39:24 31SZ3660_090

Vary the lumbar support by movingthe lever on the right side of theseat-back. Pivot the lever forwarduntil it stops, then let it return. Doingthis several times adjusts the lumbarsupport through its full range.

The seat adjustment switches are onthe outside edge of the seat bottom.Push the long horizontal switchforward or backward to move theseat bottom in that direction.Adjust the seat-back angle bypushing the vertical switch in thedirection you want to move.

The head restraints help protect youand your passengers from whiplashand other injuries. They are mosteffective when you adjust them sothe back of the occupant’s head restsagainst the center of the restraint. Ataller person should adjust therestraint as high as possible.

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

14Driver’s Lumbar Support Front Passenger’s Seat

AdjustmentsHead Restraints

Seat Adjustments


01/09/28 19:39:33 31SZ3660_091

The lid of the console compartmentcan be used as an armrest at thehigh or low position. To raise thearmrest, push the button on the lid.Make sure the armrest is securelylatched. To lower it, press the buttonand push the armrest down until itlatches.

Make sure the passengers’ hands orfingers are away from the armrestbefore pushing it down.

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release buttonand pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

The head restraints adjust for heightand tilt. You need both hands toadjust the restraint. Do not attemptto adjust it while driving. To raise it,pull upward. To lower the restraint,push the release button sidewaysand push the restraint down. Toadjust the tilt, pivot the headrestraint to the desired position.

Armrest

Seat Adjustments, Armrest


PPuusshh

RREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:39:42 31SZ3660_092

Make sure all items in the trunk andthose extending through the pass-through are secured.

For security, this cover can belocked and unlocked only with themaster key. To lock the cover, insertthe key and turn it clockwise.

Never drive with this cover open andthe trunk lid open.See onpage .

The rear seat armrest is located atthe center of the rear seat. Pivot itdown to use it.

The pass-through cover can beopened from either side; it foldsforward onto the center armrest.Open the cover by sliding the knobdownward and pushing or pulling onthe cover. To close the cover, swingit up and push firmly on the top.Make sure it latches properly.

49Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Trunk Pass-through Cover

Armrest


KKNNOOBB

LLIIDD

01/09/28 19:39:51 31SZ3660_093

Adjust the outside mirrors with theadjustment button on the driver’sdoor armrest:

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has an automaticanti-glare mechanism. When theAUTO switch is pushed in, theindicator will light. When the mirrorsenses light from the headlights ofthe car behind you, the mirrorsurface will automatically darken toreduce the glare.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Mirrors


SSEELLEECCTTOORR SSWWIITTCCHH

OONN SSTTAARRIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

AANNTTII GGLLAARREEIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

AANNTTII GGLLAARREE SSWWIITTCCHH

01/09/28 19:40:01 31SZ3660_094

The outside mirrors are heated to re-move fog and frost. With the ignitionswitch ON (II), turn on the heatersby pressing the button. The light inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns off theadjustment button so you can’tmove a mirror out of position byaccidentally bumping the button.

Move the mirror right, left, up ordown by pushing the adjustmentbutton in that direction.

Outside mirror positions can bestored in the driving positionmemory system (see page ).

4.

3.

93

Mirrors


HHEEAATTEEDD MMIIRRRROORR BBUUTTTTOONN

AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:40:09 31SZ3660_095

Press and release the MEMObutton on the control panel. Youwill hear a beep. Immediatelypress and hold one of the memorybuttons (1 or 2) until you hear twobeeps. The indicator light in thememory button will come on. Thecurrent positions of the driver’sseat, steering wheel, and outsidemirrors are now stored.

Your Acura has a memory featurefor the steering wheel, driver’s seat,and outside mirror positions.

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).You cannot add a new drivingposition in the memory unless theignition switch is ON (II). You canrecall a memorized position withthe ignition switch in any position.

Store a driving position as explainedin this section only when the car isparked.

Two seat, steering wheel, andoutside mirror positions for differentdrivers or driving conditions can bestored in separate memories. Youselect a memorized position bypushing the appropriate button.

Adjust the seat to a comfortableposition (see page ). Adjustthe steering wheel to acomfortable position (see page

). Adjust the outside mirrorsfor best visibility (see page ).

3.

1.

2.

71

86

91

CONTINUED

Storing a Driving Position in Memory

Driving Position Memory System


MMEEMMOO BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:40:19 31SZ3660_096

Doing any of the following afterpressing the MEMO button willcancel the storing procedure.

Not pressing a memory buttonwithin 5 seconds.

Readjusting the seat or steeringposition.

You can select memorized positionsas follows.

Make sure the parking brake is setand the shift lever is in Park.

Insert the key in the ignitionswitch. If you do not insert the keyin the ignition switch, the steeringwheel will not adjust to thememorized position until you do.

Press the desired memory button(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, thenrelease the button.

The system will move the seat,steering wheel and outside mirrorsto the memorized positions. Theindicator light in the selectedmemory button will flash duringmovement. When the adjustmentsare complete, you will hear twobeeps and the indicator light willremain on.

Readjusting the outside mirrorposition.

Each memory button stores only onedriving position. Storing a newposition erases the previous settingstored in that button’s memory. Ifyou want to add a new position whileretaining the current one, use theother memory button.

All stored driving positions will belost if your car’s battery goes dead oris disconnected.

3.

1.

2.

Selecting a Memorized Position

Driving Position Memory System


MMEEMMOORRYY BBUUTTTTOONNSS

01/09/28 19:40:31 31SZ3660_097

Press any button on the controlpanel: MEMO, 1 or 2.Push any of the adjustmentswitches for the seat or steeringwheel.Shift out of Park.

If desired, you can use the adjust-ment switches to change the posi-tions of the seat, steering wheel oroutside mirrors after they are intheir memorized position. To keepthis driving position for later use,you must store it in the driving posi-tion memory.

To stop the system’s automatic ad-justment;

Adjust the outside mirrors.

If you select a memorized positionwithout inserting the key in theignition switch, only the seat andoutside mirrors will adjust. To getthe system to also adjust the steeringwheel, insert the key in the ignitionswitch. You will hear two beepswhen it is complete.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The ignition switchmust be ON (II) to use them. Pushthe front of the switch, HI, to rapidlyheat up the seat. After the seatreaches a comfortable temperature,select LO by pushing the back of theswitch. This will keep the seat warm.

CONTINUED

Seat Heaters

Driving Position Memory System, Seat Heaters


SSEEAATT HHEEAATTEERRSS

01/09/28 19:40:43 31SZ3660_098

The HI or LO indicator lights andremains lit until you turn it off bypushing the opposite side of theswitch lightly. The indicator will turnoff.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly. Select the LOsetting when the seats feel warm.The HI setting draws largeamounts of current from thebattery.

Do not use the seat heaters, evenon the LO setting, if the engine isleft idling for an extended period.They can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.In LO, the heater runs continuously.

It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat’s temperature drops. Itcontinues to cycle as long as youleave it set on HI. The HI indicatorremains lit as a reminder that youhave the heater on.

Because of the sensors for the sideairbag system, there is no heater inthe passenger’s seat-back.

To use the ski sleeve:Pull down the rear seat armrest.Open the trunk pass-throughcover by sliding the knob down-ward and pulling on the cover.

The ski sleeve allows you to carryskis or other long objects safelywithout soiling or damaging theinterior of your car. It attaches to thetrunk pass-through.

1.

Ski Sleeve

Seat Heaters, Ski Sleeve


KKNNOOBB

LLIIDD

01/09/28 19:40:56 31SZ3660_099

Follow these precautions when youuse the ski sleeve:

Use the strap on the ski sleeve tosecure it tightly to the rear seatarmrest.

Attach the ski sleeve to the trunkpass-through.

Load the skis into the ski sleevefrom the trunk. Make sure the tipof the ski sleeve is resting on thecenter console.

After use, make sure the skisleeve is dry both inside and outbefore folding it up for storage.This will help to prevent mildew.

Open the trunk. Remove the skisleeve from its storage bag.

Do not transport skis that arelonger or heavier than these limits:Maximum length: 84 in (215 cm)Maximum weight: 55 lbs (25 kg)

5.

4.

2.

3.

Ski Sleeve


01/09/28 19:41:06 31SZ3660_100

Each door has a switch that controlsits window. To open the window,push the switch down and hold it.Release the switch when you wantthe window to stop. Close thewindow by pulling back on theswitch and holding it.

The driver’s door armrest has amaster power window control panel.To open any of the passengers’ win-dows, push down on the appropriateswitch and hold it until the windowreaches the desired position. Toclose the window, pull back on thewindow switch. Release the switchwhen the window gets to the positionyou want.

Your car’s windows are electrically-powered. Turn the ignition switch toON (II) to raise or lower any window.

Power Windows


MMAAIINN SSWWIITTCCHH

DDRRIIVVEERR’’SS WWIINNDDOOWW SSWWIITTCCHH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

01/09/28 19:41:13 31SZ3660_101

－

The MAIN switch controls power tothe passenger’s window. With thisswitch off, the passenger’s windowcannot be raised or lowered. TheMAIN switch does not affect the driv-er’s window. Keep the MAIN switchoff when you have children in the carso they do not injure themselves byoperating the window unintentionally.The lights inside the switches comeon when you turn the parking lightsor headlights on.

The master control panel also con-tains these extra features:

To open the driver’swindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down, then release it.The window automatically goesdown all the way. To stop thewindow from going all the way down,pull back on the window switchbriefly.

To open or close the driver’s windowpartially, push down or pull back onthe window switch lightly and hold it.The window will stop when yourelease the switch.

To close the driver’s window fully,pull back the window switch firmly,then release it. The windowautomatically goes all the way up. Tostop the window from going all theway up, push down on the windowswitch briefly.

If the driver’s window runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will stop, and thenreverse direction. To close thewindow, remove the obstacle, thenuse the window switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

CONTINUED


AUTO

Power Windows

Auto Reverse

99

01/09/28 19:41:22 31SZ3660_102

There are two switches on theceiling near the front ceiling light.The ignition switch must be ON (II).

To open the moonroof, pull theOPEN/CLOSE switch backward andhold it until the moonroof reachesthe desired position.

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, or the driver’s windowfuse is removed, the AUTO functionwill be disabled. The power windowsystem needs to be reset afterreconnecting the battery or installingthe fuse. You should do the following.

Pull back on the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely then hold the switchfor a further second or two more.

Start the engine. Push down onthe driver’s window switch untilthe window is fully open.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourcar checked by an Acura dealer.

The power window system has a key-off delay function. The windows willstill operate for up to ten minutesafter you turn off the ignition.Opening either front door cancelsthe delay function. You must turnthe ignition switch ON (II) againbefore you can raise or lower thewindows.1.

2.

Moonroof

Power Windows, Moonroof


OOPPEENN//CCLLOOSSEESSWWIITTCCHH

01/09/28 19:41:32 31SZ3660_103

When you push and hold the TILT-UP switch, the rear of the moonroofwill tilt up. To close it, push theOPEN/CLOSE switch forward. Ifyou pull the switch backward andhold it, the moonroof will tilt downand then open. The AUTO functioncannot work with the moonroof inthe tilt up position.

To close the moonroof, push theOPEN/CLOSE switch forward andhold it. The moonroof will not closecompletely; it will stop about 5.1inches (130 mm) away from beingclosed. Make sure your passengersare clear of the moonroof, thenrelease the switch and push itforward again to close the moonroofcompletely.

The moonroof has an AUTOfunction. To open the moonroof fully,pull the OPEN/CLOSE switchbackward firmly until it clicks, thenrelease it. The moonroof opensautomatically all the way. To stop themoonroof from opening all the way,push the switch forward briefly. Toopen the moonroof partially, pull theOPEN/CLOSE switch backwardlightly and hold it until the moonroofreaches the desired position. TheAUTO function only works to openthe moonroof.

Moonroof


TTIILLTT--UUPP SSWWIITTCCHH If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

01/09/28 19:41:39 31SZ3660_104

The digital clock displays the timewith the ignition switch ON (II). Tosee the time with the ignition off,press and hold the wide button to theright of the clock.

To apply the parking brake, depressthe pedal fully. To release it, pull therelease lever. The parking brakelight on the instrument panel shouldgo out when the parking brake isfully released with the enginerunning (see page ). If you try todrive the car without releasing theparking brake, the ABS indicatormay come on, and the ABS may notwork properly. The VSA systemindicator will also come on along

with the ABS indicator (see page).

54

199

3.5 RL without Navigation System

Parking Brake Digital Clock

Parking Brake, Digital Clock


PPAARRKKIINNGGBBRRAAKKEE PPEEDDAALL

RREELLEEAASSEE LLEEVVEERR

Driving the car with the parking brakeapplied can damage the rear brakesand axles.

01/09/28 19:41:49 31SZ3660_105

To set the clock:

Turn the ignition switch ON (II) todisplay the time.

Swing down the front cover of thewide button to the right of theclock display. You will see HOUR,MIN., and RESET buttons.

Press and hold the HOUR buttonuntil the hour advances to thedesired hour.

Press and hold the MIN. buttonuntil the numbers advance to thedesired time.

You can use the RESET button toquickly set the time to the nearesthour. If the displayed time is beforethe half hour, pressing the RESETbutton sets the clock back to theprevious hour. If the displayed timeis after the half hour, pressing theRESET button sets the clock for-ward to the beginning of the nexthour.

1:06 would RESET to 1:00.1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

For example:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Digital Clock


HHOOUURR RREESSEETTMMIINN..

01/09/28 19:41:59 31SZ3660_106

You may also store small items inthis holder. Make sure they aresmall enough to let the holder closeand latch, and that they are notheavy enough to cause the holder topop open while driving.

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. It will unlatch andswing down. To close it, push it untilit latches. Make sure the holder isclosed while you are driving.

Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

Sunglasses Holder


PPuusshh

SSUUNNGGLLAASSSSEESS HHOOLLDDEERR

01/09/28 19:42:06 31SZ3660_107

To use the front beverage holder,push on the lid. The beverage holderwill pop out. To close it, pushit until it latches.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holder. A spilled liquid thatis very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids can alsodamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

The rear seat also has a beverageholder in the center armrest. To useit, pivot the armrest down.

Beverage Holder


01/09/28 19:42:14 31SZ3660_108

The coin box is located under the airvent. To open the coin box, push onthe front. To close it, push it in untilit clicks.

You can put small items in the traylocated in the console compartmentlid. To use the tray, pull the rightlever and lift up the armrest pad.

To open the console compartment,pull the left lever and lift the lid.

To close, lower the lid and push itdown until it latches.

Coin BoxConsole Compartment

Console Compartment, Coin Box


LLEEVVEERR

CCOOIINN BBOOXXCCOONNSSOOLLEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT

LLEEVVEERR

01/09/28 19:42:25 31SZ3660_109

To use the sun visor, pull it down.You can also use the sun visor at theside window. Remove the supportrod from the clip and swing the sunvisor toward the side window. In thisposition, the sun visor can beextended by sliding out theextension.

To use a vanity mirror on the back ofthe sun visor, pull up the cover.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the car. Do not use thesun visor extension over the rearview mirror.

The light beside the mirror comeson when you pull up the cover.

Sun Visor Vanity Mirror

Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror


EEXXTTEENNSSIIOONN

01/09/28 19:42:35 31SZ3660_110

To use the accessory power socket,pull down on the cover. The ignitionswitch must be in ACCESSORY (I)or ON (II).

This socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

It will not power an automotive typecigarette lighter element.

Route the wire through the notch inthe edge of the console compartment.

Accessory Power Socket


NNOOTTCCHH

AACCCCEESSSSOORRYY PPOOWWEERR SSOOCCKKEETT

01/09/28 19:42:43 31SZ3660_111

The cigarette lighter is next to thefront ashtray under the ashtray lid.Open the lid by pushing on it.

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) for thecigarette lighter to work. To heat upthe lighter, push it in. It will pop outwhen it is ready for use. Do not holdthe lighter in while it is heating up,you could cause it to overheat.

Cigarette Lighter


CCIIGGAARREETTTTEE LLIIGGHHTTEERR

PPuusshh

01/09/28 19:42:49 31SZ3660_112

The rear ashtrays are in the frontlower corner of each door. Open theashtray by swinging the upper edgeof the lid down. To remove theashtray for emptying, open it, thenlift up and out.

Open the front ashtray by pushingon the lid. To close the ashtray, pushit in until it clicks shut. To remove itfor emptying, grasp the tab on theleft side of the inner tray and lift it upand out.

Ashtrays


IINNNNEERR TTRRAAYY

AASSHHTTRRAAYYTTAABB

Use the ashtray only f or cigarettes,cigars, and other smoking materials.To prevent a possible f ire and damageto your car, don’t put paper or otherthings that can burn in the ashtray.

01/09/28 19:42:55 31SZ3660_113

Both front and rear ceiling lightscontain a main light as well as twospotlights.

With the light switch in the AUTOposition, you can use the rearspotlights only when the headlightsturn on automatically.The front ceiling light has a three-

position switch. With the switch inthe OFF position (far left), the mainlights do not come on. In the centerposition, the main lights come onwhen you open any door. After alldoors are closed tightly, they dimslightly then fade out in about 10seconds. In the ON position (far

right), the main lights stay oncontinuously.

Turn on the spotlights in the frontand rear ceiling lights by pushing thegrey button next to each light. Pushthe button again to turn it off. Youcan use the front spotlights at alltimes. The rear spotlights only lightwhen the parking lights or head-lights are on.

U.S. models only

Ceiling Lights


FFRROONNTT

OOFFFF

OONN

RREEAARR

01/09/28 19:43:05 31SZ3660_114

In addition to the ceiling lights, yourAcura has courtesy lights in eachdoor and the ignition switch.

Even if the door is open, the lightswill turn off after three minuteswhen the key is not in the ignitionswitch or the ignition switch is in theLOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)position, and the light switch is in theoff position.

The door courtesy lights and ceilinglights (with the switch in the centerposition) come on when you unlockthe door with the key, lock tab onthe driver’s door, master door lockswitch, or remote transmitter (seepage ). If you relock the driver’sdoor or close the driver’s door withthe key in the ignition switch, thelights turn off immediately.Otherwise, they remain on, then fadeout in about 10 seconds.

The door courtesy lights come onwhenever you open any door. Afterall doors are closed tightly, they dimslightly then fade out in about 10seconds.

The courtesy light in the ignitionswitch comes on when you open thedriver’s door. It remains on about 10seconds after the door is closed.

The door courtesy lights and ceilinglights (with the switch in the centerposition) also come on when youremove the key from the ignitionswitch. If you do not open a door,they stay on, then fade out in about10 seconds.

79

Courtesy Lights


01/09/28 19:43:14 31SZ3660_115

...............Climate Control System . 114

.......Fully-automatic Operation . 116

.......Semi-automatic Operation . 117

.......Fully-automatic Operation . 121

.......Semi-automatic Operation . 122........................Rear Ventilation . 126

Sunlight Sensor/............Temperature Sensor . 127

................................Audio System . 128AM/FM/Cassette Stereo

........................Audio System . 128

.................Operating the Radio . 129

.................Adjusting the Sound . 132............Audio System Lighting . 133

Operating the Cassette.....................................Player . 133

............Tape Search Functions . 134.....Operating the CD Changer . 136

.................Operating the Radio . 139

.................Adjusting the Sound . 142............Audio System Lighting . 143

....................Radio Frequencies . 143

........................Radio Reception . 143Operating the Cassette

.....................................Player . 145............Tape Search Functions . 145

Caring for the Cassette.....................................Player . 148

.....Operating the CD Changer . 149........Loading the CD Changer . 151.......Protecting Compact Discs . 153

CD Changer Error.............................Indications . 154

...........Remote Audio Controls . 155.......................Theft Protection . 156

............................Security System . 157...............................Cruise Control . 158

HomeLink Universal...........................Transceiver . 162

...............Customer Assistance . 162.Important Safety Precautions . 162

..................Training HomeLink . 163Training with a Rolling Code

....................................System . 164...........................Erasing Codes . 166

............................................OnStar . 167


3.5 RL with Navigation System



Comfort and Convenience Features

Comfort and Convenience Features 113

01/09/28 19:43:18 31SZ3660_116

The automatic climate controlsystem in your Acura picks theproper combination of air condi-tioning, heating, and ventilation tomaintain the interior temperatureyou select. The system also adjuststhe fan speed and air flow levels.

The direction of air flow from thevents in the center and each side ofthe dashboard is adjustable. Movethe tab in the center of each vent up-and-down and side-to-side.

The side vents can be opened andclosed with the dials next to them.

The climate control system draws airthrough the exterior vents at thebottom of the windshield. Keepthese vents clear of leaves and otherdebris.

For the climate control system toprovide heating and cooling, theengine must be running.

In the rear seat, you can also adjustthe ventilation when the climate con-trol system is on (see page ).126


Climate Control System

114

CCEENNTTEERR VVEENNTTSS

OOppeenn

CClloossee

SSIIDDEE VVEENNTTSS

01/09/28 19:43:28 31SZ3660_117



01/09/28 19:43:32 31SZ3660_118

Pressing the OFF button shuts theclimate control system completelyoff. Keep the system completely offonly for short periods. To keep staleair and mustiness from collecting,you should have the fan running atall times.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upperlimit (90°F/32°C), the system runsat full cooling or heating only. It doesnot regulate the interior temperature.When the temperature is set

between the lower and upper limits,the system regulates the interiortemperature to the set value.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature from its current level tothe set temperature.

To put the Automatic ClimateControl in fully-automatic mode,press the AUTO button and set thefan control dial to AUTO, then setthe desired temperature by turningthe temperature control dial. You willsee FULL AUTO in the system’sdisplay. The light above either the

or button also goeson to show you which is selected.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until the carhas been driven for a short time andthe heater starts to develop warm air.



Fully-automatic Operation3.5 RL without Navigation System

116

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREECCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

FFUULLLL AAUUTTOODDIISSPPLLAAYY

FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLLDDIIAALL

AAUUTTOOBBUUTTTTOONN

OOFFFFBBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:43:42 31SZ3660_119

CONTINUED

You can manually select variousfunctions of the Climate Controlsystem when it is in FULL AUTO.All other features remain auto-matically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordFULL to go out.

When you turn the A/C off, the sys-tem cannot regulate the inside tem-perature if you set the dial below theoutside temperature. With the A/Con, use the temperature control dialto adjust the temperature of the airflow to a comfortable setting.

With the A/C in economy mode, youwill see A/C ECON in the system’sdisplay. Use this mode to get betterfuel economy.

Press the A/C button to operate theair conditioning. Each time you pressthe A/C button, the display showsthe mode: A/C ECON, A/C OFF, orA/C ON.

In this mode, you may feel a slight re-duction in cooling efficiency. If youwant more cooling, select A/C ON orFULL AUTO.



Semi-automatic Operation

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

117


AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGGBBUUTTTTOONN

RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTEEDD AAIIRR FFRREESSHH AAIIRR

01/09/28 19:43:52 31SZ3660_120

You can manually select the fanspeed by turning the fan control dial.When you turn the dial clockwise,the fan is taken out of automaticmode and starts to run at its lowestspeed. Turning the dial fullyclockwise increases the fan’s speed,which increases air flow.

Use the MODE button to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the side vents and thedashboard corner vents in all modes.Each time you press the MODEbutton, the display shows the modeselected. Press the button four timesto see all the modes.

These two buttons control thesource of the air going into the sys-tem. In Fresh Air mode ( ),air is brought in from outside the ve-hicle. In Recirculation mode( ), air from the car’s interioris sent through the system again.You can, for example, manually putthe system in recirculation modewhen driving through an area ofsmoke or fumes. When you pressthe or button, thelight in that button comes on.



Mode Button

Recirculated and Fresh Air

Fan Control Dial

118

MMOODDEE BBUUTTTTOONN FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTEEDD AAIIRR FFRREESSHH AAIIRR

01/09/28 19:44:00 31SZ3660_121

CONTINUED

The main air flow is dividedbetween the dashboard vents andthe floor vents.

The main air flow is dividedbetween the floor vents and de-froster vents at the base of the wind-shield.

The main air flow comesfrom the floor vents.

The main air flow comesfrom the dashboard vents.



01/09/28 19:44:09 31SZ3660_122

The button directs the mainair flow to the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anyMODE selection you may have made.

When you select , the A/Cturns on automatically and thesystem selects Fresh Air mode. Forfaster defrosting, manually set thefan speed to high. You can alsoincrease air flow to the windshield byclosing the side vents in thedashboard.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.


Comfort and Convenience Features120

01/09/28 19:44:16 31SZ3660_123

To put the Automatic ClimateControl in fully-automatic mode,press the AUTO button and set thefan control dial to AUTO, then setthe desired temperature by turningthe temperature control dial. You willsee FULL AUTO in the system’sdisplay. The light above the

button also shows you whichmode, Recirculation or Fresh Air, isselected.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upperlimit (90°F/32°C), the system runsat full cooling or heating only. It doesnot regulate the interior temperature.

When the temperature is setbetween the lower and upper limits,the system regulates the interiortemperature to the set value.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature from its current level tothe set temperature.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until the carhas been driven for a short time andthe heater starts to develop warm air.

Pressing the OFF button shuts theclimate control system completelyoff. Keep the system completely offonly for short periods. To keep staleair and mustiness from collecting,you should have the fan running atall times.



Fully-automatic Operation3.5 RL with Navigation System

121

FFUULLLL AAUUTTOODDIISSPPLLAAYY

OOFFFFBBUUTTTTOONN

AAUUTTOOBBUUTTTTOONN


FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLLDDIIAALL

01/09/28 19:44:25 31SZ3660_124

You can manually select variousfunctions of the Climate Controlsystem when it is in FULL AUTO.All other features remain auto-matically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordFULL to go out.

When you turn the A/C off, the sys-tem cannot regulate the inside tem-perature if you set the dial below theoutside temperature. With the A/Con, use the temperature control dialto adjust the temperature of the airflow to a comfortable setting.

With the A/C in economy mode, youwill see A/C ECON in the system’sdisplay. Use this mode to get betterfuel economy.

Press the A/C button to operate theair conditioning. Each time you pressthe A/C button, the display showsthe mode: A/C ECON, A/C OFF, orA/C ON.

In this mode, you may feel a slight re-duction in cooling efficiency. If youwant more cooling, select A/C ON orFULL AUTO.

Semi-automatic Operation

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button



RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN


AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGGBBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:44:34 31SZ3660_125

CONTINUED

This button controls the source ofthe air going into the system. Whenthe indicator above this button is lit,air from the car’s interior is sentthrough the system again (Recircula-tion mode). When the indicator is off,air is brought in from outside the car(Fresh Air mode).You can, for example, manually putthe system in recirculation modewhen driving through an area ofsmoke or fumes.

You can manually select the fanspeed by turning the fan control dial.When you turn the dial clockwise,the fan is taken out of automaticmode and starts to run at its lowestspeed. Turning the dial fullyclockwise increases the fan’s speed,which increases air flow.

Use the MODE button to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the side vents and thedashboard corner vents in all modes.Each time you press the MODEbutton, the display shows the modeselected. Press the button four timesto see all the modes.

Mode Button

Recirculation Button

Fan Control Dial



RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN

FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL MMOODDEE BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:44:45 31SZ3660_126

The main air flow is dividedbetween the dashboard vents andthe floor vents.

The main air flow is dividedbetween the floor vents and de-froster vents at the base of the wind-shield.

The main air flow comesfrom the floor vents.

The main air flow comesfrom the dashboard vents.



01/09/28 19:44:52 31SZ3660_127

The button directs the mainair flow to the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anyMODE selection you may have made.

When you select , the A/Cturns on automatically and thesystem selects Fresh Air mode. Forfaster defrosting, manually set thefan speed to high. You can alsoincrease air flow to the windshield byclosing the side vents in thedashboard.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).71



Rear Window Defogger Button

125

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:45:01 31SZ3660_128

○－●

－

The air flow from the rear vents canbe adjusted when the climate controlsystem is on.

(Upper position):Air flows from the upper vents in theback of the center console.

(Lower position):Air flows from the lower vents.

(Upper position): Maximum(Center position): Moderate(Lower position): Off

(Center position):Air flow is divided between the uppervents and the lower vents in the backof the center console.

You can adjust the direction of theair coming from the upper vents inthe center console by moving the tabin the center of each vent up-and-down and side-to-side.

You can also adjust the amount ofthe air flow by sliding the air flowcontrol lever under the upper vents.Slide this lever upward to increasethe amount of air flow.

Use the mode control lever to selectthe air flow level. Air flows into therear seat at three levels.

Rear Ventilation Mode Control Lever



MMOODDEECCOONNTTRROOLLLLEEVVEERR

LLOOWWEERRVVEENNTTSS

AAIIRR FFLLOOWWCCOONNTTRROOLLLLEEVVEERR

UUPPPPEERRVVEENNTTSS

01/09/28 19:45:14 31SZ3660_129

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is locatedin the top of the dashboard and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Sunlight Sensor/TemperatureSensor



SSUUNNLLIIGGHHTT SSEENNSSOORR TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE SSEENNSSOORR

01/09/28 19:45:21 31SZ3660_130

＊

＊

Your Acura’s audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset buttons allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

The cassette system features Dolbynoise reduction, automatic sensing ofchromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, andauto-reverse for continuous play.

The anti-theft feature will disable thesystem if it is disconnected from thecar’s battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page ).156

2

Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

AM/FM/Cassette Stereo AudioSystem



Audio System


01/09/28 19:45:31 31SZ3660_131

－

－

－

－＋＋

－

You can use any of three methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, or the Presetbuttons.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the TUNE knob to the right totune to a higher frequency, or to theleft to tune to a lower frequency.Turn the knob right or left until thedisplay reaches the desiredfrequency.

You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, push ei-ther side of the SEEK/SKIP buttons( or ). Push the button toscan up from the current frequency,and the button to scan down. Itstops when it finds a station with astrong signal.

The band and frequency that the ra-dio was last tuned to is displayed. Tochange bands, press the AM/FM but-ton. On the FM band, ST will be dis-played if the station is broadcastingin stereo. ST will flash if you are driv-ing in an area where the radio signalis weak. Stereo reproduction on AMis not available.

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM button.Adjust the volume by turning theknob.

CONTINUED

TUNE

Preset

SEEK

Operating the Radio

Audio System



129

01/09/28 19:45:42 31SZ3660_132

To store a frequency:

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each Presetbutton.

Use the TUNE or SEEK functionto tune the radio to a desiredstation.

Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the properPreset button to tune to it.The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour car’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Audio System


PPWWRR//VVOOLLKKNNOOBB

AAMM//FFMMBBUUTTTTOONN

SSTTEERREEOOIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

TTUUNNEEKKNNOOBB

SSEEEEKK//SSKKIIPPBBUUTTTTOONNSS

PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS

01/09/28 19:45:52 31SZ3660_133

－ If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SELECT button. A. SELECT willappear in the display, and the systemwill go into scan mode for severalseconds. It automatically scans bothbands, looking for stations withstrong signals. It stores the frequen-cies of six AM stations and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.You can then use the preset buttonsto select those stations.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored.

With Auto Select on, you cannotmanually store any frequencies inthe preset buttons. If you do not likethe stations found by Auto Select,you can use the TUNE and SEEKfunctions to find other stations.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by pressing theA. SELECT button. The presetbuttons will then select the fre-quencies you originally set.

AUTO SELECT

Audio System


AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN


TTUUNNEEKKNNOOBB


01/09/28 19:46:00 31SZ3660_134

－

－

These twocontrols adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.The Balance control adjusts the side-to-side strength, while the Fadercontrol adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

To adjust the fader, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Pull it out slightly farther,and adjust the front-to-back sound toyour liking. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

To adjust the balance, push on theTREBLE/BALANCE control knobto get it to pop out. Pull it out slightlyfarther, and adjust the side-to-sidesound to your liking. Push the knobback in when you are done so youcannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

Use these controlsto adjust the tone to your liking.

To adjust the Treble level, push onthe TREBLE/BALANCE controlknob to get it to pop out. Withoutpulling it out farther, turn the knobto adjust the treble level. Push theknob back in when you are done soyou cannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

To adjust the Bass level, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Without pulling it outfarther, turn the knob to adjust thebass level. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

Adjusting the SoundBalance/Fader

Treble/Bass

Audio System


BBAASSSS//FFAADDEERRCCOONNTTRROOLL

TTRREEBBLLEE//BBAALLAANNCCEECCOONNTTRROOLL

01/09/28 19:46:10 31SZ3660_135

▲

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the tape will begin playingwhere it left off.

To switch to the radio or CDchanger while listening to a tape,press the AM/FM or CD/TAPE but-ton. To change back to the cassetteplayer, press the CD/TAPE button.

Make sure the tape opening on thecassette is facing to the right, theninsert the cassette most of the wayinto the slot. The system will pull itin the rest of the way, and begin toplay.

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROG/PLAY button.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. If the tape wasnot recorded with Dolby noise reduc-tion, turn it off by pressing the

button.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control dial to adjust the il-lumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

For information, See page .

66

141

Audio System


Operating the Cassette PlayerAudio System Lighting

Radio Frequencies and Reception

133

01/09/28 19:46:23 31SZ3660_136

－

With a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, TMS, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

Fast Forward and Re-wind move the tape rapidly. To re-wind the tape, push the REW button.You will see REW in the display. Tofast forward the tape, push the FFbutton. You will see FF displayed.Press the PROG/PLAY button totake the system out of rewind or fastforward. When the system reachesthe end of the tape, it reversesdirection and begins to play if in fastforward, or it begins to play if inrewind.

Audio System


Tape Search Functions

FF/REW

134


TTMMSS IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

DDOOLLBBYY IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

EEJJEECCTTBBUUTTTTOONN

RREEPPEEAATTIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

RREEPPEEAATTBBUUTTTTOONN

TTMMSSBBUUTTTTOONN

DDOOLLBBYY BBUUTTTTOONN

FFAASSTT FFOORRWWAARRDDBBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD//TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEWWIINNDDBBUUTTTTOONN

PPRROOGG//PPLLAAYYBBUUTTTTOONN

TTAAPPEEDDIIRREECCTTIIOONNIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB

CCAASSSSEETTTTEE SSLLOOTT

01/09/28 19:46:32 31SZ3660_137

－ The Tape Music SearchFunction allows you to find the begin-ning of a song or passage. To acti-vate TMS, press the TMS button.You will see TMS displayed. To findthe beginning of the song or passagecurrently playing, push the REW but-ton. You will see REW flashing in thedisplay as the tape rewinds. To findthe beginning of the next song, pushthe FF button. You will see FFflashing in the display as the tapefast forwards. When the systemfinds the beginning of a song or pas-sage, it goes back to PLAY mode.Press the TMS button again to turnit off.

CONTINUED

Audio System


TMS

135


TTAAPPEEDDIIRREECCTTIIOONNIINNDDIICCAATTOORR


EEJJEECCTTBBUUTTTTOONN

RREEPPEEAATTIINNDDIICCAATTOORR




TTMMSS IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

TTMMSS BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:46:40 31SZ3660_138

－ The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the REPEATbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind.When it senses the beginning of thesame song or passage, the systemreturns to PLAY mode. It willcontinue to repeat this sameprogram until you deactivateREPEAT by pressing the buttonagain.

The TMS and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

Damaged cassettes can jam insidethe drive or cause other problems.See page for information oncassette care and protection.

A Compact Disc changer is standardequipment. It holds up to six discs,providing several hours of continu-ous entertainment. You operate theCD changer with the same controlsused for the radio and cassetteplayer.

To load the CDs in the magazine andload the magazine into the CDchanger, refer to page . Play onlystandard round discs. Odd-shapedCDs may jam in the drive or causeother problems.

Pressing the REW or FF button alsoturns off REPEAT. Do not play discs with disc

accessories such as protective sealsor rubbers. Using them may alsocause the audio system tomalfunction.

159148

Audio System


REPEAT

Caring for Cassettes

Operating the CD Changer

136

01/09/28 19:46:51 31SZ3660_139

－

CONTINUED

To operate the CD changer, the igni-tion switch must be in ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II).

Select the CD mode by pressing theCD/TAPE button. You will see ‘‘CD’’in the display. The system will startto play the first track of the first discin the magazine. You will see thedisc and track number displayed.

When that disc ends, the next disc inthe magazine is loaded and played.After the last disc finishes, thesystem returns to disc 1.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate preset button (1 6). Ifyou select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will, afterfinding that slot empty, try to loadthe CD in the next slot. Thiscontinues until it finds a CD to loadand play.

Audio System



PPWWRR//VVOOLLKKNNOOBB



AAUUTTOOSSEELLEECCTTBBUUTTTTOONN



AA..SSEELLEECCTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/09/28 19:46:59 31SZ3660_140

－＋

＋

－

－

－

You can use the SEEK/SKIP buttonsto select tracks within a disc. If youpush and release either side of theSEEK/SKIP buttons ( or ), thesystem will move to the beginning ofa track. Push the button to moveto the beginning of the next track,and push the button to move tothe beginning of the current track.

If you push and hold the SEEK/SKIP button, you will hear a beepand the system will continue to moveacross tracks. Release the buttonwhen you think it has reached the de-sired place on the disc.

When you activate theRepeat feature by pressing theREPEAT button, the system continu-ously replays the current track. Youwill see RPT in the display as areminder. Press the REPEAT buttonagain to turn it off.

This feature,when activated, plays the tracks on aCD in random order, rather than inthe order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressthe A. SELECT button. You will seeA. SELECT in the display. The sys-tem will then select and play tracksrandomly on the current disc. Whenall tracks on that disc have beenplayed, the next disc is loaded andplayed randomly. This continues un-til you deactivate Random Play bypressing A. SELECT again.

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM/FM button or insert acassette in the player. If a tape isalready in the cassette player, pressthe CD/TAPE button. When youreturn to CD mode, play will contin-ue at the same point that it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or the ignition switch, play willcontinue at the same point when youturn it back on.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.153

Audio System


REPEAT

RANDOM PLAY

Protecting Compact Discs

138

01/09/28 19:47:09 31SZ3660_141

－

－

－

－＋

＋－

You can use any of three methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, or the Presetbuttons.

You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.

The band and frequency that the ra-dio was last tuned to is displayed. Tochange bands, press the AM/FM but-ton. On the FM band, ST will be dis-played if the station is broadcastingin stereo. ST will flash if you are driv-ing in an area where the radio signalis weak. Stereo reproduction on AMis not available.

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM button.Adjust the volume by turning theknob.

Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Push and release the appropriateside of the bar quickly. Thefrequency numbers will change insmall increments.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, pusheither side of the SEEK bar ( or

) until you hear a beep. Push thebar on the side to scan up fromthe current frequency, and on theside to scan down. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

CONTINUED

PresetOperating the Radio

TUNE

SEEK

Audio System



139

01/09/28 19:47:20 31SZ3660_142

To store a frequency:

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each Presetbutton.

Use the TUNE or SEEK functionto tune the radio to a desiredstation.

Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the properPreset button to tune to it.The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour car’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Audio System




TTUUNNEE//SSEEEEKK BBAARR

SSTTEERREEOOIINNDDIICCAATTOORR


01/09/28 19:47:31 31SZ3660_143

－ If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SELECT button. A. SELECT willappear in the display, and the systemwill go into scan mode for severalseconds. It automatically scans bothbands, looking for stations withstrong signals. It stores the frequen-cies of six AM stations and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.You can then use the preset buttonsto select those stations.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored.

With Auto Select on, you cannotmanually store any frequencies inthe preset buttons. If you do not likethe stations found by Auto Select,you can use the TUNE and SEEKfunctions to find other stations.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by pressing theA. SELECT button. The presetbuttons will then select the fre-quencies you originally set.

AUTO SELECT

Audio System



TTUUNNEE//SSEEEEKK BBAARR



AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTTIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/09/28 19:47:39 31SZ3660_144

－

－

These twocontrols adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.The Balance control adjusts the side-to-side strength, while the Fadercontrol adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

To adjust the fader, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Pull it out slightly farther,and adjust the front-to-back sound toyour liking. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

To adjust the balance, push on theTREBLE/BALANCE control knobto get it to pop out. Pull it out slightlyfarther, and adjust the side-to-sidesound to your liking. Push the knobback in when you are done so youcannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

Use these controlsto adjust the tone to your liking.

To adjust the Treble level, push onthe TREBLE/BALANCE controlknob to get it to pop out. Withoutpulling it out farther, turn the knobto adjust the treble level. Push theknob back in when you are done soyou cannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

To adjust the Bass level, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Without pulling it outfarther, turn the knob to adjust thebass level. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

Adjusting the SoundBalance/Fader

Treble/Bass

Audio System


BBAASSSS//FFAADDEERRCCOONNTTRROOLL

TTRREEBBLLEE//BBAALLAANNCCEECCOONNTTRROOLL

01/09/28 19:47:48 31SZ3660_145

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control dial to adjust the il-lumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

Your Acura’s radio can receive thecomplete AM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band:530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band:87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

How well your Acura’s radio receivesstations is dependent on manyfactors, such as the distance fromthe station’s transmitter, nearbylarge objects, and atmosphericconditions.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator will

go off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

66

CONTINUED

Audio System Lighting

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

Audio System


01/09/28 19:48:02 31SZ3660_146

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Audio System


01/09/28 19:48:10 31SZ3660_147

▲

－

Make sure the tape opening on thecassette is facing to the right, theninsert the cassette most of the wayinto the slot. The system will pull itin the rest of the way, and begin toplay.

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROG/PLAY button.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton.

With a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, TMS, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the tape will begin playingwhere it left off.

To switch to the radio or CDchanger while listening to a tape,press the AM/FM or CD/TAPE but-ton. To change back to the cassetteplayer, press the CD/TAPE button.

Fast Forward andRewind move the tape rapidly. Torewind the tape, push the REWbutton. The indicator in this buttonwill light. To fast forward the tape,push the FF button. The indicator inthis button will light. Press thePROG/PLAY button to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it reverses direction andbegins to play if in fast forward, or itbegins to play if in rewind.

Dolby B noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a cassette. Theindicator in the button will light.If the tape was not recorded withDolby B noise reduction, turn it offby pressing the button.

CONTINUED

Operating the Cassette Player Tape Search Functions

FF/REW

Audio System


01/09/28 19:48:22 31SZ3660_148

－

－＋

－

＋

The Tape Music SearchFunction allows you to find thebeginning of a song or passage. Toactivate TMS, push either side of theTMS bar ( or ). To find thebeginning of the song or passagecurrently playing, push the bar onthe side. You will see TMSindicator and the indicator in theREW button flashing. To find thebeginning of the next song, push thebar on the side. You will see TMSindicator and the indicator in the FFbutton flashing.

Audio System


TMS

146


EEJJEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN


PPRROOGG//PPLLAAYYBBUUTTTTOONN


TTAAPPEE DDIIRREECCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR


TTMMSS BBAARR FFAASSTT FFOORRWWAARRDDBBUUTTTTOONN

TTMMSS IINNDDIICCAATTOORR DDOOLLBBYYBBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD//TTAAPPEEBBUUTTTTOONN


01/09/28 19:48:29 31SZ3660_149

－

The TMS and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the REPEATbutton to activate it; you will seeREPEAT displayed as a reminder.When the system reaches the end ofthe song or passage currentlyplaying, it will automatically go intorewind. When it senses thebeginning of the same song orpassage, the system returns to PLAYmode. It will continue to repeat thissame program until you deactivateREPEAT by pressing the buttonagain.Pressing the REW or FF button alsoturns off REPEAT.

Audio System


REPEAT

147

RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN


TTMMSS BBAARR

RREEWWIINNDD BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:48:36 31SZ3660_150

The cassette player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. This contami-nation builds up over time andcauses the sound quality to degrade.To prevent this, you should clean theplayer after every 30 hours of use.Your dealer has a cleaning kitavailable.

If you do not clean the cassetteplayer regularly, it may eventuallybecome impossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit.

Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.Cassettes longer than that usethinner tape that may break or jamthe drive.

Look at the cassette before youinsert it. If the tape is loose, tightenit by turning a hub with a pencil oryour finger.If the label is peeling off, remove itfrom the cassette or it could causethe cassette to jam in the player.Never try to insert a warped ordamaged cassette in the player.

When they are not in use, storecassettes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace cassettes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a cassette isexposed to extreme heat or cold, letit reach a moderate temperaturebefore inserting it in the player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the cassette player.

If you see the error indication‘‘ ’’ (3.5 RL with navigationsystem)/‘‘ ’’ (3.5 RL withoutnavigation system) on the display,press the EJECT button to removethe cassette from the unit. Makesure the tape is not damaged. If thecassette will not eject or the errorindication stays on after the cassetteejects, take the car to your Acuradealer.

Caring for the Cassette Player

Audio System


01/09/28 19:48:48 31SZ3660_151

CONTINUED

A Compact Disc changer is standardequipment. It holds up to six discs,providing several hours of continu-ous entertainment. You operate theCD changer with the same controlsused for the radio and cassetteplayer.

To load the CDs in the magazine andload the magazine into the CDchanger, refer to page . Play onlystandard round discs. Odd-shapedCDs may jam in the drive or causeother problems.

Select the CD mode by pressing theCD/TAPE button. You will see ‘‘CD’’in the display. The system will startto play the first track of the first discin the magazine. You will see thedisc and track number displayed.

When that disc ends, the next disc inthe magazine is loaded and played.After the last disc finishes, thesystem returns to disc 1.

To operate the CD changer, the igni-tion switch must be in ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II).

Do not play discs with discaccessories such as protective sealsor rubbers. Using them may alsocause the audio system tomalfunction.

159

Operating the CD Changer

Audio System




RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN



SSEEEEKK BBAARR


01/09/28 19:48:59 31SZ3660_152

－

－

－＋＋

－

－

－＋

This feature,when activated, plays the tracks on aCD in random order, rather than inthe order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressthe A. SELECT button. You will seeA. SELECT in the display. The sys-tem will then select and play tracksrandomly on the current disc. Whenall tracks on that disc have beenplayed, the next disc is loaded and

played randomly. This continues un-til you deactivate Random Play bypressing A. SELECT again.

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM/FM button or insert acassette in the player. If a tape isalready in the cassette player, pressthe CD/TAPE button. When youreturn to CD mode, play will contin-ue at the same point that it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or the ignition switch, play willcontinue at the same point when youturn it back on.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate preset button (1 6). Ifyou select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will, afterfinding that slot empty, try to loadthe CD in the next slot. Thiscontinues until it finds a CD to loadand play.

You can use the SEEK bar to selecttracks within a disc. If you push andrelease either side of the SEEK bar( or ), the system will move tothe beginning of a track. Push thebutton to move to the beginning ofthe next track, and push the but-ton to move to the beginning of thecurrent track.

When you activate theRepeat feature by pressing theREPEAT button, the systemcontinuously replays the currenttrack. You will see REPEAT in thedisplay as a reminder. Press theREPEAT button again to turn it off.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.

If you push and hold the SEEK bar( or ), you will hear a beep andthe system will continue to moveacross tracks. Release the buttonwhen you think it has reached thedesired place on the disc.

153

RANDOM PLAY

REPEAT


Audio System


01/09/28 19:49:08 31SZ3660_153

Slide the lid to open the CDchanger.

The CD changer is located in thetrunk on the driver’s side.

Push the EJECT button to removethe CD magazine. The magazinewill pop up automatically.

1. 2.

CONTINUED

Loading the CD Changer

Audio System


SSlliiddee

EEJJEECCTTBBUUTTTTOONNCCDD CCHHAANNGGEERR

01/09/28 19:49:18 31SZ3660_154

Put a CD on a tray with the printedsurface up as shown.

Reinstall the tray in the magazine.Repeat this procedure for the oth-er five trays.

Store all six trays in the magazine,and then reinstall the magazine inthe CD changer as shown in the il-lustration.

To install a CD, pull the tab out toremove the tray from the maga-zine.

Slide the lid closed until it clicks.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

Audio System


TTAABB

TTRRAAYY

01/09/28 19:49:27 31SZ3660_155

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the disc, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, felt-tippens, and labels can cause the CD tonot play properly, or possibly jam inthe drive.


Audio System


01/09/28 19:49:36 31SZ3660_156

If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourAcura dealer.

Indication Cause Solution

Disc-changermalfunction.

High temperature.

Misconnection ordisconnection of CDchanger.No CD magazine in theCD changer.No CD in magazine.

Press the magazine eject button. If themagazine does not eject, consult your Acuradealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

See your Acura dealer.

Insert a CD magazine.

Insert a CD in the magazine.

CD Changer Error Indications

Audio System


01/09/28 19:49:46 31SZ3660_157

▲ ▼

Two controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The top and bottom buttons adjustthe volume up ( ) or down ( ).Press the proper button and hold ituntil the desired volume is reached,then release it.

The AUDIO/CH button has threefunctions, depending on whether youare listening to the radio, or playing acassette or CD.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe AUDIO/CH button to changestations. Each time you press thisbutton, the system advances to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. You will see thenumber of the selected Preset buttonin the display. To change bands,press the AM/FM button on theaudio system’s front panel.

If you are playing a cassette, use theAUDIO/CH button to advance to thenext selection. You will see ‘‘FF’’blinking in the display when youpress the AUDIO/CH button. Thesystem fast forwards until it senses asilent period, then goes back toPLAY.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you push theAUDIO/CH button. You will see thedisc and track number in the display.

Remote Audio Controls

Audio System


AAUUDDIIOO//CCHHBBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:49:56 31SZ3660_158

You will have to store your favoritestations in the Preset buttons afterthe system begins working. Youroriginal settings were lost whenpower was disconnected.

Your car’s audio system will disableitself if it is disconnected fromelectrical power for any reason. Tomake it work again, the user mustenter a specific five-digit code in thePreset buttons. Because there arehundreds of number combinationspossible from five digits, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, or the radio fuse isremoved, the audio system willdisable itself. If this happens, youwill see ‘‘Code’’ in the frequencydisplay the next time you turn on thesystem. Use the Preset buttons toenter the five-digit code. If it isentered correctly, the radio will startplaying.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s codenumber and serial number. It is bestto store this card in a safe place athome. In addition, you should writethe audio system’s serial number inthis Owner’s Manual. If you shouldhappen to lose the card, you mustobtain the code number from yourAcura dealer. To do this, you willneed the system’s serial number.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over or try tocorrect your mistake. Complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have three tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in three attempts, youmust then leave the system on forone hour before trying again.

Theft Protection

Audio System


01/09/28 19:50:03 31SZ3660_159

Once the security system is set,opening any door (without using thekey or the remote transmitter), orthe hood, will cause it to alarm. Italso alarms if the radio is removedfrom the dashboard or the wiring iscut.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the master keyor the remote transmitter withouttriggering the alarm. The alarm willsound if the trunk lock is forced, orthe trunk is opened with the trunkrelease button on the driver’s door.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the Door and Brake LampMonitor on the instrument panel(see page ), to see if the doorsand trunk are fully closed. Since it isnot part of the monitor display,manually check the hood.

The security system sets auto-matically fifteen seconds after youlock the doors, hood, and trunk. Forthe system to activate, you must lockthe doors from the outside with thekey, lock tab, door lock switch, orremote transmitter. The securitysystem light next to the driver’s doorlock starts blinking immediately toshow you the system is setting itself.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

The security system helps to protectyour car and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourcar or remove the radio. This alarmcontinues for two minutes, then thesystem resets. To reset an alarmingsystem before the two minutes haveelapsed, unlock either front doorwith the key or the remotetransmitter.

57


Security System

157

SSEECCUURRIITTYY SSYYSSTTEEMM LLIIGGHHTT

01/09/28 19:50:11 31SZ3660_160

Push in the Cruise Control MasterSwitch to the left of the steeringcolumn. The indicator in theswitch will light.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forconditions such as city driving,winding roads, slippery roads, heavyrain, or bad weather. You shouldhave full control of the car underthose conditions.

1.

2.

Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control


CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL MMAASSTTEERR SSWWIITTCCHHImproper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

01/09/28 19:50:20 31SZ3660_161

Press and release the SET/decelbutton on the steering wheel. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel comes on toshow the system is now activated.

The cruise control may not hold theset speed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down to the desired speed. Thiswill cancel the cruise control. Toresume the set speed, press theRESUME/accel button. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel comes on.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RESUME/accel button. The car will acceler-ate. When you reach the desiredcruising speed, release the button.

Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-celerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the SET/decelbutton.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RESUME/accel button repeatedly. Each timeyou do this, your car will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

3.

CONTINUED

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control


SSEETT//ddeecceellBBUUTTTTOONN

RREESSUUMMEE//aacccceellBBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:50:30 31SZ3660_162

You can cancel the cruise control inany of these ways:

Tap the brake pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Press the Cruise Control MasterSwitch.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the SET/decelbutton. The car will decelerate.Release the button when youreach the desired speed.

Tap the brake pedal lightly withyour foot. The CRUISECONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out.When the car slows to the desiredspeed, press the SET/decel button.The car will then maintain thedesired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/decelbutton repeatedly. Each time youdo this, your car will slow downabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The carwill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake pedalwill cause the cruise control tocancel.

Cancelling the Cruise Control

Cruise Control


CCAANNCCEELLBBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:50:42 31SZ3660_163

Pressing the Cruise Control MasterSwitch turns the system completelyoff and erases the previous cruisingspeed from memory. To use thesystem again, refer to

.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake pedal, the CRUISECONTROL light on the instrumentpanel will go out and the car willbegin to slow down. You can use theaccelerator pedal in the normal way.

The system remembers thepreviously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h), then pressand release the RESUME/accelbutton. The CRUISE CONTROLlight comes on, and the car willaccelerate to the same cruisingspeed as before.

Using theCruise Control

Cruise Control


01/09/28 19:50:47 31SZ3660_164

The HomeLink UniversalTransceiver built into your car canbe programmed to operate remotely-controlled devices around your home,such as garage doors, lighting, orhome security systems. It canreplace up to three remotetransmitters.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated by thetransmitter, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go to www.homelink.com.

Always refer to the operatinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with the HomeLinkUniversal Transceiver. If you do nothave this information, you shouldcontact the manufacturer of theequipment.

While training or using HomeLink,make sure you have a clear view ofthe garage door or gate, and that noone will be injured by its movement.

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, it isrecommended that you unplug themotor for that device duringtraining. Repeatedly pressing theremote control button could burnout the motor.

HomeLink stores the code in apermanent memory. There shouldbe no need to retrain HomeLink ifyour car’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected.If your garage door opener wasmanufactured before April 1982, youmay not be able to programHomeLink to operate it. Garage dooropeners manufactured before thatdate do not have a safety feature thatcauses them to stop and reverse if anobstacle is detected during closing,increasing the risk of injury. If youhave questions, call (800) 355-3515.

Customer Assistance

Important Safety Precautions General Information

HomeLink Universal Transceiver


01/09/28 19:50:57 31SZ3660_165

－

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to Step 1.

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the house current.

Before you can use HomeLink tooperate devices around your home, itmust ‘‘learn’’ the proper codes. Forexample, to train HomeLink to openand close the garage door:

If you just tookdelivery of your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button. To do this,press and hold the two outsidebuttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 20 seconds,until the red light flashes. Releasethe buttons, then proceed to Step 1.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote control 2 to 5inches from HomeLink. Makesure you are not blocking yourview of the red light in HomeLink.

Select the HomeLink button youwant to train.

Press the button on the remotecontrol and the button onHomeLink at the same time. Holddown both buttons.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Training HomeLink Before you begin



01/09/28 19:51:08 31SZ3660_166

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so they send andreceive the correct codes.

The remote control you are trainingfrom may stop transmitting after twoseconds. This is not long enough forHomeLink to learn the code. Releaseand press the button on the remotecontrol every two seconds untilHomeLink has learned the code.

The red light in HomeLink shouldbegin flashing. It will flash slowlyat first, then rapidly.

When the red light flashes rapidly,release both buttons. HomeLinkshould have learned the code fromthe remote control.

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinktransceiver button by pushing it. Itshould operate the garage door.

If the button does not work, repeatthis procedure to train it again. If itstill does not work, you may have a

variable or rolling code garagedoor opener. Test this by pressingand holding the HomeLinktransceiver button you just trained.If the red light blinks for twoseconds, then stays on, you have arolling code garage door opener.You may be able to verify this withthe manufacturer’s documentation.Go to ‘‘Training With a RollingCode System.’’

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other remotely-controlled devices around yourhome (lighting, automatic gate,security system, etc.).

5.

6.

7.

8.

Canadian Owners: Training With a Rolling CodeSystem



01/09/28 19:51:19 31SZ3660_167

－

－

It may be helpful to have someoneassist you with this procedure.

Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer. Themanufacturer’s documentationmay help.

Press the Training button on thegarage door opener unit until thelight next to the button comes on,then release it. The light may blink,or come on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 4 seconds.(The same button you trained withthe ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure.)

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 4 seconds.This should turn off the traininglight on the garage door openerunit. (Some systems may requireyou to press the button up to threetimes.)

Press the HomeLink button again.It should operate the garage door.

6.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.



TTRRAAIINNIINNGGBBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:51:29 31SZ3660_168




To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the red lightbegins to flash, then release thebuttons.

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the car.

To train an already programmedHomeLink button to operate a newdevice:

Select the HomeLink button youwant to train.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton until the red light begins toflash slowly (approximately 20seconds).

While continuing to hold theHomeLink button, place theremote control for the device 2 to5 inches from HomeLink.

Press and hold the button on theremote control. Hold both buttonsuntil the red light begins to flashrapidly.

Release both buttons. HomeLinkshould now be trained to operatethe device.

1.

3.

2.

4.

5.

Erasing Codes

Retraining a Button



01/09/28 19:51:42 31SZ3660_169

The OnStar system in your vehiclegives you immediate access to a widerange of services and informationwith the touch of a button. AnOnStar advisor is available 24 hoursa day, 7 days a week.

The basic Safety & Security Planprovides:

Press this button to contact anOnStar advisor. You will hear achime, followed by theannouncement, ‘‘Connecting toOnStar.’’ The connection should take20 to 30 seconds. The advisor willassist you with any of the servicesincluded in your plan.

Depending on what service yourequest, you may need to give yourPersonal Identification Number(PIN) to the advisor. Your PIN is anumber you make up and providewhen you establish your OnStarservice.

If cellular telephone service is notavailable in the area you are drivingin, you will hear a fast busy signal.The system will retry the connectionseveral times before returning to theready mode.

Roadside Assistance.Emergency Services.Automatic Notification of AirbagDeployment.Accident Assist.Remote Door Locking/Unlocking.Stolen Vehicle Tracking.Misplaced Vehicle Assistance.

The Premium Service Plan providesthese additional features:

Route Support.Ride Assist.Information and ConvenienceServices.Concierge Services.

The OnStar control buttons andindicator are located in the base ofthe rear view mirror.

CONTINUED


OnStar System

OnStar Services ButtonOnStar Control Panel

167

OOnnSSttaarr BBUUTTTTOONN

SSYYSSTTEEMMSSTTAATTUUSS LLIIGGHHTT

EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYYBBUUTTTTOONN

CCAALLLLAANNSSWWEERR//EENNDDBBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:52:02 31SZ3660_170

－

－

－

－

To cancel these retries, press theCall Answer/End (DOT) button.

A microphone is located in the baseof the rear view mirror so you canspeak to the advisor without takingyour hands off the steering wheel ordiverting your attention from theroad. The OnStar advisor’s voicecomes from the audio system’sspeakers. Use the volume control onthe audio system or on the steeringwheel to adjust the volume.

Press this button to contact anOnStar advisor only if you have anemergency situation. You will hear atone, followed by the announcement,‘‘Connecting to OnStar Emergency.’’Your call is given highest priority.

The advisor will ask about the natureof the emergency, locate yourvehicle, and notify the appropriateemergency service agencies.

Press this ‘‘DOT’’ button to end a callto the OnStar advisor, or to cancelthe call if you should press one ofthe other buttons accidentally. If theOnStar center should call you, pressthis button to answer the call.

This button is also used to initiatethe Personal Calling and VirtualAdvisor services, if you havesubscribed.

This light shows you the status ofthe system.

The system is readyfor use.

A call is inprogress.

There is a problem inthe system. Press the OnStar buttonto contact an advisor. If the callconnects, the advisor will assist youwith verifying the system’s operation.If you are not able to contact anadvisor, take your vehicle to anAcura dealer to have the systemdiagnosed.

There is a problemin the system with a call in progress.

If you press this button accidentally,do not cancel the call. Wait until theOnStar advisor answers, then explainyour mistake.

Emergency Button

Call Answer/End Button

Solid Green

Blinking Green

Solid Red

Blinking Red

System Status Light

OnStar System


01/09/28 19:52:17 31SZ3660_171

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

The OnStar system uses the GlobalPositioning System (GPS) to locateyour vehicle whenever you place acall. This allows the advisor toquickly contact the nearest serviceswithout requiring you to providedetailed directions.

Contactthe OnStar advisor if you needassistance with a problem (flat tire,out of fuel, etc.) while traveling. Theadvisor will contact an appropriateagency to come and assist you.

Contact anOnStar advisor if you have anemergency situation. The advisorwill contact the nearest emergencyservices provider (ambulance, firedepartment, etc.) and advise them ofyour situation.

If you are ever in anaccident that causes the airbags todeploy, the OnStar systemautomatically places a call (providedthe OnStar system and your vehicle’selectrical system are still intact). Theadvisor will attempt to speak to youto evaluate the situation, and contactthe nearest emergency servicesprovider.

The OnStaradvisor can help you if you are everin a minor accident by giving you alist of information you should collectat the accident scene.Complete,detailed information will make iteasier to complete accident reportsand insurance claims.

By sending a signal to yourvehicle, the advisor can lock orunlock your vehicle’s doors. This ishelpful if you are away from your

vehicle and realize you forgot to lockthe doors, or if you have locked thekeys in your vehicle. To get OnStar’sassistance, call (888) 4-ONSTAR(466-7827).

UsingGPS, OnStar can locate your vehiclealmost anywhere. If your vehicle isever stolen, contact OnStar at (888)4-ONSTAR. The advisor will put youin contact with the proper authorities,and assist them with locating yourvehicle.

If you are unable to locate yourvehicle in a large parking lot orparking structure, contact OnStar at(888) 4-ONSTAR. The advisor willremotely activate the exterior lightsand the horn, allowing you to locateyour vehicle.


OnStar System

Safety and Security Plan Features

Roadside Assistance

Emergency Services

Automatic Notif ication of AirbagDeployment

Accident Assist

Remote Door Locking/Unlocking

Stolen Vehicle Tracking

Misplaced Vehicle Assistance

169

01/09/28 19:52:28 31SZ3660_172

－

－

－

－

－The Premium Service Plan providesthese additional features.

The OnStaradvisor can give you verbaldirections from your current locationto a desired destination.

If you need a ride(taxi, limousine service, etc.) theOnStar advisor can make thearrangements for you. Use theOnStar button or call (888)4-ONSTAR.

The OnStar advisor cangive you information on nearbyhotels, restaurants, ATMs, hospitals,gas stations, and many otherservices in any area you are travelingin. The advisor can also help youwith hotel or restaurant reservations.

The OnStaradvisor can assist you withpurchasing theater tickets, airlinetickets, rental car reservations for avacation, and just about any otherpurchase you desire.

The OnStar Personal Calling plan isan extra-cost option that gives youthe ability to use your vehicle’sOnStar system as a hands-freecellular telephone.

To sign up for Personal Calling,press the OnStar button in yourvehicle, and notify the advisor thatyou’d like to sign up. The advisor willget all the information needed to setup your account, and provide youwith your new cellular telephonenumber.

You will need to provide a credit cardnumber, and prepurchase ‘‘units’’ orminutes of air time (one unit equals

one minute).

Youmust use voice commands to givethe OnStar system your callinginformation. To make a phone call:

Press the Call Answer/End(DOT) Button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’Say ‘‘Dial.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘NumberPlease.’’Say the first digit of the number.OnStar will repeat that digit.Always wait for OnStar to confirmthe digit before going to the nextdigit.Say the second digit of the number.OnStar will repeat that digit.

Premium Service Plan Features

Route Support

Ride Assist

Information and ConvenienceServices

Concierge Services

Personal Calling

Placing a Telephone Call

OnStar System


01/09/28 19:52:45 31SZ3660_173

－

－

－

－

Continue this until you have givenOnStar the complete telephonenumber. Then say ‘‘Dial.’’

If the system has difficultyunderstanding a voice command, itcan respond with:

‘‘Pardon’’ The system could notmatch your voice command to one itknows. Repeat the commanddistinctly.

‘‘Slower please’’ The systemmissed the command because it wasnot yet ready for it, or there was toomuch background noise. Repeat thecommand after a short pause.

Withvoice feedback off, the system willrespond with a tone rather than‘‘Ready,’’ or repeating each numberyou say. Other responses will still beby voice. To turn voice feedback onor off:

Press the DOT button.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Dialing’’and then repeat the completetelephone number. It will thenplace the telephone call.When you have finished yourconversation, press the DOTbutton again to hang up.

If you make a mistake speaking adigit of the phone number, or thesystem responds with the wrongdigit, say ‘‘Clear.’’ This will cause thesystem to erase the last digit.

If you need to cancel the phone callattempt before entering thecomplete phone number, say ‘‘Cancel.’’The system will cancel the operationand return to Ready.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’Say ‘‘Voice Feedback.’’

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Voicefeedback On/Off.’’

When someone places a telephonecall to you, the audio system willmute and you will hear the ring.Press the DOT button to answer thecall. When you have completed thecall, press the DOT button again tohang up.

The OnStar system can store up totwenty 32-digit telephone numbers inits memory. When you store thesenumbers in its memory, you giveeach one a nametag. When you wantto place a telephone call, you canrecall the number by giving thesystem the nametag.

CONTINUED


OnStar System

Voice Feedback On/Off

Incoming Telephone Calls

Using Nametags

171

01/09/28 19:52:59 31SZ3660_174

－

－

＜＞

＜＞

－

To store atelephone number and its nametag inthe system:

Press the DOT button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’Say ‘‘Store.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘NumberPlease.’’Say the first digit of the number.OnStar will repeat that digit.Say the second digit of the number.OnStar will repeat that digit.Continue this until you have givenOnStar the complete telephonenumber. Then say ‘‘Store’’ again.OnStar will respond with‘‘Nametag Please.’’

Say the name that you wantassigned to that telephone number.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Again.’’Repeat the nametag.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Oncemore.’’Repeat the nametag.

Toplace a telephone call using anametag:

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Storingnametag .’’

Press the DOT button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’Say ‘‘Call.’’OnStar will respond with‘‘Nametag Please.’’Say the nametag for the numberyou want to call.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Calling

nametag ,’’ then place thetelephone call.

If you have forgotten what nametagsyou have stored, the system will readthem to you. Press the DOT button.When the system responds with‘‘Ready,’’ say ‘‘Directory.’’

To delete anametag and telephone number frommemory:

Press the DOT button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’Say ‘‘Delete.’’OnStar will respond with‘‘Nametag Please.’’

Storing a Nametag

Placing a Telephone Call

Deleting a Nametag

OnStar System


01/09/28 19:53:24 31SZ3660_175

＜＞

＜＞

－

＜＞

Say the nametag for the numberyou want to delete.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Delete

nametag , Yes or No.’’Say ‘‘Yes.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Deleting

nametag .’’

To redialthe last telephone number youcalled:

Press the DOT button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’Say ‘‘Redial.’’OnStar will respond with‘‘Redialing,’’ then place thetelephone call.

By giving the system a security codethat you make up, you can lock outthe Personal Calling and VirtualAdvisor capabilities of the system sounauthorized people cannot maketelephone calls. To turn security on

or off:

Press the DOT button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’Say ‘‘Security.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Enterfour-digit security code.’’Say the first digit of the code.OnStar will repeat that digit.

OnStar will repeat that digit.Say the second digit of the code.

Say the third digit of the code.OnStar will repeat that digit.Say the fourth digit of the code.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Securitycode number is now ON/OFF.’’

You must prepurchase units(minutes) of cellular air time. TheOnStar system tracks how manyunits you have remaining.

To find out how many units you haveremaining:

Press the DOT button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’Say ‘‘Units.’’

If you forget the security codeentered, or someone else enters asecurity code unknown to you, youmust contact an OnStar advisor toreset the code. Press the OnStarbutton, or call (888) 4-ONSTAR.

CONTINUED


OnStar System

Redialing a Number

Security Code

Keeping Track of Units

173

01/09/28 19:53:49 31SZ3660_176

＜＞

－

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Verifyor add.’’Say ‘‘Verify.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Youhave number units remaining.’’

To purchase moreunits of cellular air time:

Press the DOT button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’Say ‘‘Units.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Verifyor add.’’Say ‘‘Add.’’OnStar will connect you to anadvisor to handle your purchase.

For an additional fee, you can alsoenjoy the benefits of Virtual Advisor.This feature lets you hearinformation in your vehicle aboutweather, sports, news, and stocks. Itis even possible to have your e-mailread to you.

Although Virtual Advisor canprovide information on manysubjects, you can set up acustomized profile with OnStar thatmakes it easier to get informationabout areas that are of specificinterest to you. To do this, you mustgo to the OnStar web site, www.onstar.com. This is a secure site; youwill need your account number andPIN to access your accountinformation and to design yourcustomized profile.

If you do not have Internet access, adefault profile can be set up for you.

To use the Virtual Advisor from yourvehicle:

Press the DOT button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’Say ‘‘Virtual Advisor.’’

The system will connect you to theVirtual Advisor. The Virtual Advisorwill prompt you for the informationyou desire.

If you would like to hear a list ofvoice commands that are available,say ‘‘Help.’’ OnStar is continuallyupgrading the system, and newcommands become available.

You can also call OnStar at (888) 4-ONSTAR, or get information aboutyour account at the OnStar web site,www.onstar.com.

Adding Units

OnStar Virtual Advisor

OnStar System


01/09/28 19:54:08 31SZ3660_177

You make up and provide yourPersonal Identification Number(PIN) when you establish youraccount with OnStar. You shouldwrite down your PIN and keep itwith you at all times.

You can change your PIN at any time.Contact the OnStar advisor bypressing the OnStar button, or bycalling (888) 4-ONSTAR.

If you forget your PIN, contact theOnStar advisor. For security reasons,your PIN will be mailed to you.

OnStar uses the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) to locate your vehiclefor functions such as route guidanceand roadside assistance. GPS isaffected by structures that canobstruct the signal, such as tunnels,parking structures, and tall buildings.It may not be possible for OnStar topinpoint your location if you are in ornear such structures.

OnStar uses cellular technology tocommunicate with your vehicle.Cellular coverage varies by location,which may affect the ability toestablish a connection, or the qualityof the connection.

When you turn off your vehicle’signition, the OnStar system goes intolow-power mode. After 48 hours, itswitches to sleep mode to conserveyour vehicle’s battery power.Features such as remote doorunlocking and misplaced vehicleassistance will not work after yourvehicle has been parked for morethat 48 hours.


OnStar System

Personal Identif ication Number System Limitations

175

01/09/28 19:54:19 31SZ3660_178

176

01/09/28 19:54:21 31SZ3660_179

Before you begin driving your Acura,you should know what gasoline touse, and how to check the levels ofimportant fluids. You also need toknow how to properly store luggageor packages. The information in thissection will help you. If you plan toadd any accessories to your car,please read the information in thissection first.

.............................Break-in Period . 178.........................................Gasoline . 178

.........Service Station Procedures . 179................Filling the Fuel Tank . 179

....................Opening the Hood . 180...............................Oil Check . 181

.........Engine Coolant Check . 182...............................Fuel Economy . 183

............................Car Condition . 183...........................Driving Habits . 183

...Accessories and Modifications . 184.............................Carrying Cargo . 186

Before Driving

Before Driving 177

01/09/28 19:54:26 31SZ3660_180

During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

If you are unable to find premiumunleaded gasoline, you may substi-tute an unleaded regular gasoline.The engine will compensate for thelower octane, but you may notice aslight decrease in power as a result.

We recommend gasolines containingdetergent additives that help preventfuel system and engine deposits.

Avoid hard braking. New brakesneed to be broken-in by moderateuse for the first 200 miles (300km).

Your Acura is designed to operate onpremium unleaded gasoline with apump octane number of 91 or higher.

In Canada, some gasolines containan octane-enhancing additive calledMMT. If you use such gasolines,your emissions control systemperformance may deteriorate andthe Malfunction Indicator Lamp onyour instrument panel may turn on.If this happens, contact yourauthorized Acura dealer for service.

Help assure your car’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).

Using gasoline containing lead willdamage your car’s emissionscontrols. This contributes to airpollution.

Do not change the oil until therecommended time or mileageinterval shown in the maintenanceschedule.

You should follow these same re-commendations with an overhauledor exchanged engine, or when thebrakes are relined.

Break-in Period, Gasoline

Before Driving

Break-in Period Gasoline

178

01/09/28 19:54:38 31SZ3660_181

Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the cap in the holder on thefuel fill door.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Because the fuel fill cap is on thedriver’s side of the car, park withthat side closest to the servicestation pumps.

Your car has an on-board refuelingvapor recovery system to helpkeep fuel vapors from going intothe atmosphere. If the fuel nozzlekeeps clicking off even though thetank is not full, there may be aproblem with this system. Consultyour dealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Filling the Fuel Tank

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving 179

PPuullll

FFUUEELL FFIILLLL CCAAPP

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

01/09/28 19:54:50 31SZ3660_182

Standing in front of the car, reachin between the hood and the frontbumper with your finger. Slide thelatch handle.

Shift to Park or Neutral and setthe parking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Screw the fuel fill cap back on,tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. If you do not properlytighten the cap, the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp may come on (seepage ).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

1. 2.

5.

6.

297


Before Driving

Opening the Hood

180

HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE

LLAATTCCHH HHAANNDDLLEE

01/09/28 19:55:00 31SZ3660_183

CONTINUED

Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Check the engine oil level every timeyou fill the vehicle with fuel. Wait afew minutes after turning the engineoff before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

If you can open the hood withoutsliding the hood latch handle, or thehood latch handle moves stiffly ordoes not spring back as before, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated (see page ).

Lift the hood up most of the way.The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

To close the hood, lower it to about afoot (30 cm) above the fender, thenpress down firmly with your hands.After closing the hood, make sure itis securely latched.

2.

1.

3.

241


Before Driving

Oil Check

181

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK

01/09/28 19:55:12 31SZ3660_184

Refer toon page for information

on checking other items in yourAcura.

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Remove the dipstick again andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Insert it all the way back in its tube. 4.3.

227

231

225


Before Driving

Owner MaintenanceChecks

AddingEngine Coolant

Adding Oil

Engine Coolant Check

182

MMIINN

MMAAXXLLOOWWEERR MMAARRKK

UUPPPPEERR MMAARRKK

RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK

01/09/28 19:55:22 31SZ3660_185

A cold engine uses more fuel than awarm engine. It is not necessary to‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting itidle for a long time. You can driveaway in about a minute, no matterhow cold it is outside. The enginewill warm up faster, and you getbetter fuel economy. To cut down onthe number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try tocombine several short trips into one.

You can improve fuel economy bydriving moderately. Rapid acceler-ation, abrupt cornering, and hardbraking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gear thatallows the engine to run and acceler-ate smoothly.

An important part of that mainte-nance is the

(see page ). Forexample, an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses fuel. It also wears outfaster, so check the tire pressure atleast monthly.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Turn off the A/C orset the climate control to a highertemperature to cut down on airconditioning use. Use the flow-through ventilation when the outsideair temperature is moderate.

The condition of your car and yourdriving habits are the two mostimportant things that affect the fuelmileage you get.

Always maintain your car accordingto the maintenance schedule. Thiswill keep it in top operating condition.

In winter, the build-up of snow onyour car’s underside adds weight androlling resistance. Frequent cleaninghelps your fuel mileage and reducesthe chance of corrosion.

Depending on traffic conditions, tryto maintain a constant speed. Everytime you slow down and speed up,your car uses extra fuel. Use thecruise control, when appropriate, toincrease fuel economy.

225

Driving Habits

Owner MaintenanceChecks

Car Condition

Fuel Economy

Before Driving 183

01/09/28 19:55:34 31SZ3660_186

Modifying your car, or installingsome non-Acura accessories, canmake your car unsafe. Before youmake any modifications or add anyaccessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

Your dealer has Genuine Acuraaccessories that allow you topersonalize your car. Theseaccessories have been designed andapproved for your car, and arecovered by warranty.

Non-Acura accessories are usuallydesigned for universal applications.Although aftermarket accessoriesmay fit on your car, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your car’shandling and stability. (See‘‘Modifications’’ on page foradditional information.)

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your car’scomputer-controlled systems, suchas the SRS and anti-lock brakesystem.

If possible, have your dealer inspectthe final installation.

Have the installer contact yourAcura dealer for assistance beforeinstalling any electronic accessory.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ).

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper car operation orperformance.

Before installing any accessory:

However, if electronic accessoriesare improperly installed, or exceedyour car’s electrical system capacity,they can interfere with the operationof your car, or even cause theairbags to deploy.

302

185

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving184

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourcar’s handling, stability andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

01/10/11 11:46:25 31SZ3660_187

Do not remove any originalequipment or modify your car in anyway that would alter its design oroperation. This could make your carunsafe and illegal to drive.

Such modifications can adverselyaffect handling, and interfere withthe operation of the car’s anti-lockbrakes and other systems.

Covering the outside edge of afront seat-back, with a non-Acuraseat cover for example, couldprevent the airbag from inflatingproperly.

For example, do not make anymodifications that would change theride height of your car, or installwheels and tires with a differentoverall diameter.

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thecar and hurt someone.

In addition, any modifications thatdecrease ground clearance increasethe chance of undercarriage partsstriking a curb, speed bump, or otherraised object, which could causeyour airbags to deploy.

Do not modify your steering wheelor any other part of yourSupplemental Restraint System.Modifications could make thesystem ineffective.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard, couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the car and hurtsomeone.

Modifications

Additional Safety Precautions

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving

Do not place any objects over theoutside edge of a front seat-back.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

185

01/09/28 19:55:55 31SZ3660_188

The glove box, and the pockets inthe front doors and seat-back, aredesigned for small, lightweight items.The trunk is intended for larger,heavier items.

Your car has several convenientstorage areas so you can stow cargosafely.

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour car’s handling, stability, andoperation and make it unsafe. Beforecarrying any type of cargo, be sure toread the following pages.

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving186

FFRROONNTT DDOOOORR PPOOCCKKEETTCCOONNSSOOLLEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT

GGLLOOVVEE BBOOXXSSEEAATT--BBAACCKK PPOOCCKKEETTTTRRUUNNKK

01/09/28 19:56:02 31SZ3660_189

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, or with the properoperation of the seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If the lid is open, apassenger could injure their kneesduring a crash or sudden stop.

The maximum load for your car is850 lbs (395 kg).

Do not put any items on top of therear shelf. They can block yourview and be thrown around the carduring a crash.

The final number is the total weightof cargo you can carry.

Subtract the total from 850 lbs(395 kg).

If you are towing a trailer, add thetongue weight to the numberabove.

Add up the weight of all occupants.

To figure out how much cargo youcan carry:

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, accessories,and the tongue weight if you aretowing a trailer.

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Load Limit

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving 187

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

01/09/28 19:56:15 31SZ3660_190

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of carbon monoxidepoisoning, follow the instructionson page .

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

If you can carry any items on aroof rack, be sure the total weightof the rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight. Please contact your Acuradealer for further information.

49

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or ona Roof Rack

188

01/09/28 19:56:21 31SZ3660_191

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate theautomatic transmission. It alsoincludes important information onparking your car, the braking system,the Vehicle Stability Assist System,and facts you need if you areplanning to tow a trailer.

........................Preparing to Drive . 190.......................Starting the Engine . 191

Starting in Cold Weather....................at High Altitude . 191

..............Automatic Transmission . 192.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 192

................Shift Lever Positions . 192..............Engine Speed Limiter . 194

....................Shift Lock Release . 195...........................................Parking . 196

.....................The Braking System . 197.............Brake Wear Indicators . 197

...............Brake System Design . 198.......................Anti-lock Brakes . 198

Important Safety.........................Reminders . 199........................ABS Indicator . 199

...Vehicle Stability Assist System . 201...............Driving in Bad Weather . 204

...........................Towing a Trailer . 206

Driving

Driving 189

01/09/28 19:56:26 31SZ3660_192

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood and trunk arefully closed.

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of thesteering wheel (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).Check the indicator lights in theinstrument panel.

Start the engine (see page ).

Check the gauges and indicatorlights in the instrument panel (seepage ).

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that any items you may becarrying with you inside are storedproperly or fastened downsecurely.

You should do the following checksand adjustments every day beforeyou drive your car.

Check the adjustment of the seat(see page ).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

53

15

86

91191

71

Preparing to Drive

Driving190

01/09/28 19:56:40 31SZ3660_193

Push the accelerator pedal half-way to the floor and hold it therewhile starting the engine. Do nothold the ignition key in START(III) for more than 15 seconds.When the engine starts, releasethe accelerator pedal gradually asthe engine speeds up and smoothsout.

If the engine fails to start in step 2,push the accelerator pedal to thefloor and hold it there while youtry to start the engine for no morethan 15 seconds. If the enginedoes not start, return to step 2.

If the engine still does not start,press the accelerator pedal all theway down and hold it there whilestarting in order to clear flooding.As before, keep the ignition key inthe START (III) position for nomore than 15 seconds. Return tostep 5 if the engine does not start.If it starts, lift your foot off theaccelerator pedal so the enginedoes not race.

An engine is harder to start in coldweather. The thinner air found athigh altitude above 8,000 feet (2,400meters) adds to the problem.Use the following procedure:

Turn off all electrical accessoriesto reduce the drain on the battery.

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. If the enginedoes not start right away, do nothold the key in START (III) formore than 15 seconds at a time.Pause for at least 10 secondsbefore trying again.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed half-waydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

Starting in Cold Weather at HighAltitude (Above 8,000 feet/2,400 meters)

Driving

Starting the Engine

191

01/09/28 19:56:53 31SZ3660_194

Your Acura’s transmission has fourforward speeds, and is electronicallycontrolled for smoother shifting. Italso has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converterfor better fuel economy. You mayfeel what seems like another shiftwhen the converter locks.

This indicator between the fuelgauge and temperature gauge showswhich position the shift lever is in.

The shift lever has seven positions.It must be in Park or Neutral to startthe engine. When you are stopped inD , D , 2, 1, N or R, press firmly onthe brake pedal, and keep your footoff the accelerator pedal.

The ‘‘D ’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II). If it flasheswhile driving (in any shift position),it indicates a possible problem in thetransmission. Avoid rapid acceler-ation and have the transmissionchecked by an authorized Acuradealer as soon as possible.

4 3

4

Automatic Transmission

Driving

Shift Lever Position Indicator

Shift Lever Positions

192

SSHHIIFFTT LLEEVVEERR

01/09/28 19:57:02 31SZ3660_195

－

－

－

CONTINUED

Whenever you move the shift lever,slide it along the guide on theconsole.

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Move the shiftlever to the right to shift out of the

Park position.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see Shift Lock Release on page

.

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. The shift lever must be inPark before you can remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

To shift to Reversefrom Park, see the explanation underPark. To shift to Reverse fromNeutral, come to a complete stop andthen shift. Push down on the shiftlever before shifting into Reversefrom Neutral.

Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to Park posi-tion if you need to leave the car forany reason. Press on the brake pedalwhen you are moving the shift leverfrom Neutral to another gear.

195

To shift from:P to RN to R2 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to ND to DD to 2N to DR to NR to P

Do this:Press the brake pedal.Push down on the shift lever.

Move the lever.

3

3 4

4

4 3

3

4

Driving


Park (P)

Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

193

01/09/28 19:57:13 31SZ3660_196

－

－

－

－

Use this position foryour normal driving. The transmis-sion automatically selects a suitablegear for your speed and acceleration.You may notice the transmissionshifting up at higher speeds whenthe engine is cold. This helps theengine warm up faster.

This position is similarto D , except only the first threegears are selected. Use D whentowing a trailer in hilly terrain, or toprovide engine braking when goingdown a steep hill. D can also keepthe transmission from cyclingbetween third and fourth gears instop-and-go driving.

For faster acceleration when in D orD , you can get the transmission toautomatically downshift by pushingthe accelerator pedal to the floor.The transmission will shift down oneor two gears, depending on yourspeed.

This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop. Secondgives you more power when climbing,and increased engine braking whengoing down steep hills. Use secondgear when starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow. It will helpreduce wheelspin.

To shift from Second toFirst, push down on the shift lever.With the lever in this position, thetransmission locks in First gear. Byupshifting and downshifting through1, 2, D and D , you can operate thistransmission much like a manualtransmission without a clutch pedal.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

43

3

34

3 4

Driving


Drive (D )

Drive (D )

Second (2)

First (1)

Engine Speed Limiter4

3

194

01/09/28 19:57:21 31SZ3660_197

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal does not work.

Set the Parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Put a cloth on the edge of the ShiftLock Release slot cover next tothe shift lever.Use a small flat-tipped screwdriveror small metal plate (neither areincluded in the tool kit) to removethe cover. Carefully pry on theedge of the cover.

Push down on the key and movethe shift lever out of Park toNeutral.

Insert the key in the Shift LockRelease slot.

If you need to use the Shift LockRelease, it means your car isdeveloping a problem. Have the carchecked by your Acura dealer.

Remove the key from the ShiftLock Release slot, then reinstallthe cover. Make sure the notch onthe cover is on the right side.Depress the brake pedal andrestart the engine.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Driving


Shift Lock Release

195

SSHHIIFFTT LLOOCCKK RREELLEEAASSEE SSLLOOTT

01/09/28 19:57:32 31SZ3660_198

－

Make sure the moonroof and thewindows are closed.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Turn off the lights.

Lock the doors with the key or theremote transmitter. Check theindicator on the driver’s door toverify that the security system isset.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The three way catalyticconverter gets very hot, and couldcause these materials to catch onfire.

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your car. The indicator onthe instrument panel shows that theparking brake is not fully released; itdoes not indicate that the parkingbrake is firmly set. Make sure theparking brake is set firmly or yourcar may roll if it is parked on anincline.

Set the parking brake before you putthe transmission in Park. This keepsthe car from moving and puttingpressure on the parking mechanismin the transmission making iteasier to move the shift lever out ofPark when you want to drive away.

If the car is facing uphill, turn thefront wheels away from the curb.

Make sure the parking brake is fullyreleased before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat or damagethe rear brakes.

If the car is facing downhill, turn thefront wheels toward the curb.

Parking Tips

Driving

Parking

196

01/09/28 19:57:42 31SZ3660_199

Your Acura is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The ABS helpsyou retain steering control whenbraking very hard.

Put your foot on the brake pedal onlywhen you intend to brake. Restingyour foot on the pedal keeps thebrakes applied lightly, causing themto build up heat. Heat build-up canreduce how well your brakes work. Italso keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by downshifting to a lowergear and taking your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Since alonger distance is needed to stopwith wet brakes, be extra cautiousand alert in your driving.

All four brakes have audible brakewear indicators.When the brake pads need replacing,you will hear a distinctive metallic‘‘screeching’’ sound when you applythe brakes. If you do not have thebrake pads replaced, they will beginscreeching all the time.

Your brakes may sometimes squealor squeak when you apply themlightly. Do not confuse this with thebrake wear indicators. They make avery audible ‘‘screeching.’’

Brake Wear Indicators

The Braking System

Driving 197

01/09/28 19:57:52 31SZ3660_200

this defeats thepurpose of the ABS. Let the ABSwork for you by always keeping firm,steady pressure on the brake pedalas you steer away from the hazard.This is sometimes referred to as

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal; it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes.

Activation varies with the amount oftraction your tires have. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before youactivate the ABS. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

Your car has an Anti-lock BrakeSystem (ABS) as standardequipment. ABS helps to prevent thewheels from locking up and skiddingduring hard braking, allowing you toretain steering control.

When the front tires skid, you losesteering control; the car continuesstraight ahead even though you turnthe steering wheel. The ABS helps toprevent lock-up and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly; much faster than aperson can do it.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe car (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

The ABS also balances the front-torear braking distribution accordingto vehicle loading.

‘‘stomp and steer.’’

Brake System Design Anti-lock Brakes You should never pump thebrake pedal;

The Braking System

Driving198

FFrroonntt

01/09/28 19:58:01 31SZ3660_201

＊＊

＊＊such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safe,prudent speed for the road andweather conditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your car to veer intooncoming traffic or off the road.

itonly helps with steering controlduring braking. You should alwaysmaintain a safe following distancefrom other vehicles.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

The ABS is self-checking. If anythinggoes wrong, the ABS indicator onthe instrument panel comes on (seepage ). This means the anti-lock

function of the braking system hasshut down. The brakes still work likea conventional system without anti-lock, providing normal stoppingability. You should have the dealerinspect your car as soon as possibleif this light stays on after you startthe engine, or comes on whiledriving.

56 CONTINUED

The Braking System

Driving

Important Safety Reminders

ABS IndicatorABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop the car;

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

199

UU..SS.. iinnddiiccaattoorr sshhoowwnn

AABBSS IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/09/28 19:58:13 31SZ3660_202

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the front-to-rear brakingdistribution system may also shutdown.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your carrepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

The VSA system indicator may comeon along with the ABS indicator ifthere is a problem with the anti-lockbrake system.

289

Driving

The Braking System

200

01/09/28 19:58:18 31SZ3660_203

CONTINUED

The VSA system cannot enhance thecar’s driving stability in all situationsand does not control your vehicle’sentire braking system. It is still yourresponsibility to drive and corner atreasonable speeds and to leave asufficient margin of safety.

The Vehicle Stability Assist systemhelps to stabilize the vehicle duringcornering if the car turns more orless than desired. It also assists youin maintaining traction whileaccelerating on loose or slipperyroad surfaces. It does this byregulating the engine’s output, andby selectively applying braking.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. You will also seethe VSA Activation Indicator blink. When VSA activates, you will see the

VSA Activation indicator blink.

Driving

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

VSA Activation Indicator

201

VVSSAA AACCTTIIVVAATTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/09/28 19:58:27 31SZ3660_204

The VSA system indicator (see page) comes on and stays on when

there is a problem with the VSAsystem.

If the VSA indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine, and watch theVSA system indicator. If theindicator remains on, or comes backon while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your Acuradealer.

When VSA is off, the VSA ActivationIndicator light comes on as areminder. Pressing the switch againturns the system back on.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turnedON (II), there may be a problemwith the VSA system. Have yourdealer inspect your car as soon aspossible.

Without VSA, your car will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

This switch is under the left vent.Press it to turn the Vehicle StabilityAssist system on and off.

56

Driving


VSA System Indicator VSA Off Switch

202

VVSSAA SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/09/28 19:58:38 31SZ3660_205

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove the car.

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

Deactivate the VSA system if youneed to drive with the compact sparetire installed (see page ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourcar. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour car was not equipped with VSA.

257

282

Driving


VSA and Tire Sizes

203

01/09/28 19:58:45 31SZ3660_206

－ Exercise extra caution when drivingin rain after a long dry spell. Aftermonths of dry weather, the firstrains bring oil to the surface of theroadway, making it slippery.

Rain, fog, and snow conditionsrequire a different driving techniquebecause of reduced traction andvisibility. Keep your car well-maintained and exercise greatercaution when you need to drive inbad weather. The cruise controlshould not be used in theseconditions.

Always driveslower than you would in dryweather. It takes your car longer toreact, even in conditions that mayseem just barely damp. Applysmooth, even pressure to all thecontrols. Abrupt steering wheelmovements or sudden, hard appli-cation of the brakes can cause loss ofcontrol in wet weather. Be extracautious for the first few miles(kilometers) of driving while youadjust to the change in drivingconditions. This is especially true insnow. A person can forget somesnow-driving techniques during thesummer months. Practice is neededto relearn those skills.

Driving Technique

Driving

Driving in Bad Weather

204

01/09/28 19:58:52 31SZ3660_207

－－Being able to seeclearly in all directions and beingvisible to other drivers are importantin all weather conditions. This ismore difficult in bad weather. To beseen more clearly during daylighthours, turn on your headlights.

Check your tiresfrequently for wear and properpressure. Both are important inpreventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss oftraction on a wet surface). In thewinter, mount snow tires on all fourwheels for the best handling.

Watch road conditions carefully,they can change from moment tomoment. Wet leaves can be as slip-pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can havepatches of ice. Driving conditionscan be very hazardous when theoutside temperature is near freezing.The road surface can becomecovered with areas of water puddlesmixed with areas of ice, so yourtraction can change without warning.

Be careful when downshifting. Iftraction is low, you can lock up thedrive wheels for a moment and causea skid.

Be very cautious when passing, orbeing passed by other vehicles. Thespray from large vehicles reducesyour visibility, and the wind buffetingcan cause you to lose control.

Inspect your windshield wipers andwashers frequently. Keep the wind-shield washer reservoir full of theproper fluid. Have the windshieldwiper blades replaced if they start tostreak the windshield or leave partsunwiped. Use the defroster and airconditioning to keep the windowsfrom fogging up on the inside (seepages and ).120 125

Visibility Traction

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving 205

01/09/28 19:59:00 31SZ3660_208

Your Acura has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can use it to tow atrailer if you carefully observe theload limits, use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.

The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10 percent of thetrailer weight. Too little tongueload can make the trailer unstableand cause it to sway. Too muchtongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control.

The totalweight of the trailer andeverything loaded in it must notexceed 2,000 lbs (900 kg). Towinga load that is too heavy canseriously affect your car’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

Driving

Towing a Trailer

Load Limits

Tongue Load:Total Trailer Weight:

206

01/09/28 19:59:08 31SZ3660_209

The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 percent of theload toward the front of the trailerand 40 percent toward the rear, thenre-adjust the load as needed.

on the rear axle

on the front axle

Driving

Towing a Trailer

Checking Loads

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

207

2,260 lbs (1,025 kg)

2,570 lbs (1,165 kg)

4,830 lbs (2,190 kg)

Exceeding load limits orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriouslyinjured or killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

01/09/28 19:59:18 31SZ3660_210

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, andhow much load you are towing.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and that it meetsfederal, state, province, and localregulations.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

Acura recommends that any trailerhaving a total weight of 1,000 lbs(450 kg) or more be equipped withits own electric or surge-type brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

Always use safety chains. Make surethey are secured to both the trailerand hitch, and that they cross underthe tongue so they can catch thetrailer if it becomes unhitched.Leave enough slack to allow thetrailer to turn corners easily, but donot let the chains drag on the ground.

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Hitches Trailer Brakes

Safety Chains

208

01/09/28 19:59:28 31SZ3660_211

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has a trailer lightingconnector located in the trunk by theleft taillight. To use the connector,undo the fastener on the left side ofthe trunk lining. Refer to thedrawing in this page for the wiringcolor code and purpose of each pin.

If you use a converter, you can getthe connector and pins that matewith the connector in your vehiclefrom your Acura dealer.

Since lighting and wiring vary intrailer type and brand, you shouldalso have a qualified mechanic installa suitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer.

Driving

Towing a Trailer

Trailer Lights

209

GGRROOUUNNDD((BBLLAACCKK))

RRIIGGHHTT TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL((GGRREEEENN//YYEELLLLOOWW))

TTAAIILLLLIIGGHHTT((RREEDD//BBLLAACCKK))

BBAACCKK--UUPP LLIIGGHHTT((GGRREEEENN//BBLLAACCKK))

LLEEFFTT TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL((PPIINNKK//BBLLUUEE))

BBRRAAKKEE LLIIGGHHTT((GGRREEEENN//WWHHIITTEE))

01/09/28 19:59:37 31SZ3660_212

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated (see page ),and the trailer tires and spare areinflated as recommended by thetrailer maker.

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, and cooling systemare in good operating condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits (see pages and ).

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items on and in the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

Many states and Canadian provincesrequire special outside mirrors whentowing a trailer. Even if they don’t,you should install special mirrors ifyou cannot clearly see behind you, orif the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation. 206 207

254

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Pre-Tow ChecklistAdditional Trailer Equipment

210

01/09/28 19:59:48 31SZ3660_213

CONTINUED

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and shift down to 2ndgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesdiscussed below.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently between 3rd and 4thgears while going up a hill, shift toD .

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.Use the D position when towing atrailer on level roads. D is theproper shift lever position to usewhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain.(See ‘‘ ’’ in the nextcolumn for additional gearinformation.)

3

43

Driving

Towing a Trailer

Driving Safely With a Trailer

Towing Speeds and Gears

Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Driving on Hills

211

01/09/28 20:00:00 31SZ3660_214

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailerswaying. When being passed by alarge vehicle, keep a constant speedand steer straight ahead. Do not tryto make quick steering or brakingcorrections.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including putting thetransmission in Park and firmlysetting the parking brake. Also, placewheel chocks at each of the trailer’stires.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

bottom

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Backing Up

Parking

212

01/09/28 20:00:09 31SZ3660_215

If you have the skills and tools to per-form more complex maintenancetasks on your Acura, you may wantto purchase the Service Manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your Acuradealer.

This section also includesMaintenance Schedules for normaldriving and severe driving conditions,a Maintenance Record, and instruc-tions for simple maintenance tasksyou may want to take care ofyourself.

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your car wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

......................Maintenance Safety . 214.Important Safety Precautions . 215

.................Maintenance Schedule . 216...Required Maintenance Record . 223

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 225..............................Fluid Locations . 226

......................................Engine Oil . 227..................................Adding Oil . 227

....................Recommended Oil . 227..............................Synthetic Oil . 228

....................................Additives . 228.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 229

.............................Cooling System . 231............Adding Engine Coolant . 231

.......Replacing Engine Coolant . 233....................Windshield Washers . 237

....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 238..............................Differential Oil . 239

....................................Brake Fluid . 240............................Brake System . 240

..............................Power Steering . 240....................................Hood Latch . 241

.....................Air Cleaner Element . 241....................................Spark Plugs . 243

..............................Replacement . 243............................Specifications . 246

...........................................Battery . 246.................................Wiper Blades . 249

..............Air Conditioning System . 251.................Air Conditioning Filter . 252

.....................................Drive Belts . 252....................................Timing Belt . 253

...............................................Tires . 253......................................Inflation . 253

..................................Inspection . 255..............................Maintenance . 256.............................Tire Rotation . 256

...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 257......................Wheels and Tires . 258

..........................Winter Driving . 258.............................Snow Tires . 259............................Tire Chains . 259

.............................................Lights . 260........................Replacing Bulbs . 262

...........................Storing Your Car . 271329

Maintenance

Maintenance 213

01/09/28 20:00:16 31SZ3660_216

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

This section includes instructions forsimple maintenance tasks, such aschecking and adding oil. Any serviceitems not detailed in this sectionshould be performed by an Acuratechnician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Regularly maintaining your car is thebest way to protect your investment.Proper maintenance is essential toyour safety and the safety of yourpassengers. It will also reward youwith more economical, trouble-freedriving and help reduce air pollution.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance214

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining this caror failing to correct a problembefore driving can cause acrash in which you can beseriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

01/09/28 20:00:22 31SZ3660_217

Be surethere is adequate ventilationwhenever you operate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unless in-structed to do so.

Read the instructions before youbegin, and make sure you have thetools and skills required.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, be careful when workingaround gasoline or batteries. Use acommercially available degreaser orparts cleaner, not gasoline, to cleanparts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, andflames away from the battery and allfuel-related parts.

Before you begin any maintenance,make sure your car is parked onlevel ground and that the parkingbrake is set. Also, be sure the engineis off. This will help to eliminateseveral potential hazards:

You should wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingnear the battery or when usingcompressed air.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance

Important Safety Precautions

Carbon monoxide poisoningfrom engine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

215

01/09/28 20:00:30 31SZ3660_218

The Maintenance Schedule specifieshow often you should have your carserviced and what things needattention. It is essential that you haveyour car serviced as scheduled toretain its high level of safety,dependability, and emissions controlperformance.

Avoid exceeding your car’s loadlimit. This puts excess stress onthe engine, brakes, and manyother parts of your car. The loadlimit is shown on the label on thedriver’s doorjamb.

Operate your car on reasonableroads within the legal speed limit.

Service your car according to thetime and mileage periods on one ofthe Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages. Select the schedulefor ‘‘Severe Conditions’’ if most ofyour driving is done under one ormore of the conditions listed on thatpage. Otherwise, follow the schedulefor ‘‘Normal Conditions.’’

Drive your car regularly over adistance of several miles(kilometers).

Always use unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating (see page

).

The services and time or distanceintervals shown in the maintenanceschedule assume you will use yourcar as normal transportation forpassengers and their possessions.You should also follow theserecommendations:

178

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Which Schedule to Follow:

216

01/09/28 20:00:39 31SZ3660_219

＃

We recommend the use of genuineHonda parts and fluids whenever youhave maintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, Acurarecommends that all maintenanceservices be performed at therecommended time or mileageperiod to ensure long-term reliability.

Your authorized Acura dealer knowsyour car best and can providecompetent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Keep all thereceipts as proof of completion, andhave the person who does the workfill out the Maintenance Record.Check your warranty booklet formore information.

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Maintenance, replacement orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

217

01/09/28 20:00:45 31SZ3660_220

－

＃

＃

＃

Follow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule if thesevere driving conditionsspecified in the SevereConditions MaintenanceSchedule do not apply.

NOTE: If you onlydrive under a

‘‘severe’’ condition, you shouldfollow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule.

Follow the MaintenanceSchedule for Severe Conditions.

OCCASIONALLY

Maintenance

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

218

Visually inspect the following items:

Service at the indicateddistance or time whichevercomes first.

miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

Replace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 1 year

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsCooling system hoses and connectionsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

Replace engine oilReplace engine oil filterCheck engine oil and coolantReplace air cleaner elementReplace spark plugsReplace timing belt, balancer belt, and inspectwater pumpInspect and adjust drive beltsInspect idle speedReplace engine coolant

Replace transmission fluid

Replace front differential fluidInspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace air conditioning filterRotate tires (Check tire inflation and conditionat least once per month)

152412

304824

609648

457236

7512060

9014472

10516884

12019296

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

: 217

Maintenance

ScheduleforN

ormalConditions

01/09/28 20:01:04 31SZ3660_221

－－

□

□

□

□□

□

□

□

□□□□□□□□□□

□□□□□□□

＃

＃

＃

Maintenance 219

Canadian Owners

U.S. Owners

A, B, C, D

A

B

C

D

7,500 mi/12,000 km15,000 mi/24,000 km/1yr22,500 mi/36,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs37,500 mi/60,000 km/45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs52,500 mi/84,000 km/60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs

67,500 mi/108,000 km75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs82,500 mi/132,000 km90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs

97,500 mi/156,000 km105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs

112,500 mi/180,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs

Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, D.Do items in A.

Replace front differential fluid.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace front differential fluid.Do items in A, B, C, D.Do items in A.

Replace timing belt, balancer belt, and inspectwater pump.

Check idle speed.Replace spark plugs.

Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace front differential fluid.Do items in A, B, C.

Replace engine coolant, then replace every60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs.

Replace transmission fluid, then every 90,000mi/144,000 km/5 yrs.

Replace engine oil.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 256 ).Replace engine oil filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Check parking brake adjustment.Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Replace air cleaner element.Inspect and adjust drive belts.Replace air conditioning filter.Replace brake fluid (every 3 years regardless ofmileage).

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time interval.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.

:

NOTE:

217

218 Maintenance

Schedule

forNorm

alConditions

(listedby

distance/time)

01/09/28 20:01:13 31SZ3660_222

－

＃＊＊

－

＃＊＊

＊

＃＃

Follow the Severe ConditionsMaintenance Schedule if youdrive your car underone or more of the followingconditions:

Driving less than 5 miles (8km) per trip or, in freezingtemperatures, driving lessthan 10 miles (16 km) per trip.Driving in extremely hot[over 90°F (32°C)] conditions.Extensive idling or longperiods of stop-and-go driving.Trailer towing, driving with aroof rack, or driving inmountainous conditions.Driving on muddy, dusty, orde-iced roads.

Follow the MaintenanceSchedule for Severe Conditions.

MAINLY

Maintenance

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

220

Visually inspect the following items:

Replace every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 monthsCheck oil and coolant at each fuel stop

Service at the indicateddistance or time whichevercomes first.

miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

Replace engine oil and oil filterCheck engine oil and coolantClean ( ) or replace ( ) air cleaner element

Replace spark plugsReplace timing belt , balancer belt , and

inspect water pumpInspect and adjust drive beltsInspect idle speedReplace engine coolant

Replace transmission fluidReplace front differential fluidInspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace air conditioning filterLubricate all hinges, locks, and latchesRotate tires (Check tire inflation and conditionat least once per month)

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension components, Driveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsCooling system hoses and connectionsExhaust system, Fuel lines and connections

Lights and controls, Vehicle underbody

152412

304824

457236

609648

7512060

9014472

12019296

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .See timing belt on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.See Air Conditioning Filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.

10516884

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

:1 :2 :

217253

252

Use normal schedule except in dusty conditions

1 1

2

60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years

Maintenance

ScheduleforS

evereConditions

01/09/28 20:01:35 31SZ3660_223

－－

□

□

□□

□□

□

□□□□□□□□

□□

□□□□□□□□□＃＊＊

＃

＃

＊

＊＊

＃

CONTINUEDMaintenance 221

Canadian Owners

A, B, C, D, E

U.S. Owners

A

B

C

D

E

Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time.Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.

3,750 mi/6,000 km7,500 mi/12,000 km11,250 mi/18,000 km15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr

18,750 mi/30,000 km22,500 mi/36,000 km26,250 mi/42,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs



60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Clean air cleaner element.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace front differential fluid.Do items in A, B, C, D.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace front differential fluid.Clean air cleaner element.

Do items in A, B, C, E.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace front differential fluid.Replace timing belt , balancer belt , and

inspect water pump.Do items in A, B, C, D.

Replace transmission fluid, then replace every30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs.

Replace engine oil and filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 256 ).Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Check parking brake adjustment.Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches withmultipurpose grease.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Check all lights.Inspect the underbody.Replace air cleaner element.Inspect and adjust drive belts.Replace air conditioning filter .Replace brake fluid every 3 years (independent ofmileage).

See timing belt on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.See Air Conditioning Filter on page for replacement information under special drivingconditions.See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.

1 :2 :

:

NOTE :

220

253252

217

1 1

2

Maintenance

Schedule

forSevere

Conditions

(listedby

distance/time)

01/09/28 20:01:48 31SZ3660_224

□□

□

□

□□

□□□

□□

□

□

＊＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＃

Maintenance222

See timing belt on page for replacement information underspecial driving conditions.See Air Conditioning Filter on page for replacementinformation under special driving conditions.See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.NOTE:

1 :

2 :

:

252

217



90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs93,750 mi/150,000 km97,500 mi/156,000 km101,250 mi/162,000 km105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs


120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/7 yrs

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace front differential fluid.Clean air cleaner element.

Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace front differential fluid.Do items in A, B, C, D, E.

Replace transmission fluid.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.


inspect water pump.Check idle speed.Clean air cleaner element.Replace spark plugs.

Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.


inspect water pump.Do items in A, B, C, D.

Replace engine coolant, then replace every60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs.

Replace transmission fluid.

1 1

1 1

Maintenance

ScheduleforS

evereConditions

(listed

bydistance/time)

01/10/11 11:46:32 31SZ3660_225

CONTINUEDMaintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

223

3,750 mi

7,500 mi

11,250 mi

15,000 mi

18,750 mi

22,500 mi

26,250 mi

30,000 mi

33,750 mi

37,500 mi

41,250 mi

45,000 mi

48,750 mi

52,500 mi

56,250 mi

60,000 mi

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severeconditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your car.

6,000 km

12,000 km

18,000 km

24,000 km(or 1 year)

30,000 km

36,000 km

42,000 km

48,000 km(or 2 years)

54,000 km

60,000 km

66,000 km


78,000 km

84,000 km

90,000 km


220218

01/09/28 20:02:03 31SZ3660_226

Maintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

224

63,750 mi

67,500 mi

71,250 mi

75,000 mi

78,750 mi

82,500 mi

86,250 mi

90,000 mi

93,750 mi

97,500 mi

101,250 mi

105,000 mi

108,750 mi

112,500 mi

116,250 mi

120,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

102,000 km

108,000 km

114,000 km


126,000 km

132,000 km

138,000 km


150,000 km

156,000 km

162,000 km


174,000 km

180,000 km

186,000 km


01/09/28 20:02:10 31SZ3660_227

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the page given.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Windshield washer fluid Checkthe level in the reservoir monthly.If weather conditions cause you touse the washers frequently, checkthe reservoir each time you stopfor fuel. See page .

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,turn signals, brake lights, andlicense plate lights monthly. Seepage .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

181

182

237

238

240

255

260

Owner Maintenance Checks

Maintenance 225

01/09/28 20:02:19 31SZ3660_228

Fluid Locations

Maintenance226

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICCTTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONNFFLLUUIIDD DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK((YYeellllooww lloooopp))

PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGGFFLLUUIIDD((RReedd ccaapp))

BBRRAAKKEE FFLLUUIIDD((GGrraayy ccaapp))

WWAASSHHEERR FFLLUUIIDD((BBlluuee ccaapp))

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILLFFIILLLL CCAAPP

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK((OOrraannggee lloooopp))RRAADDIIAATTOORR CCAAPP

EENNGGIINNEECCOOOOLLAANNTTRREESSEERRVVOOIIRR

01/09/28 20:02:24 31SZ3660_229

To add oil, unscrew and remove theengine oil fill cap on top of the leftvalve cover. Pour in the oil, andreplace the engine oil fill cap.Tighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes and recheck the oil level. Donot fill above the upper mark; youcould damage the engine.

Oil is major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-gradedetergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foras long as you own it.

Make sure the API Certification Sealsays ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

CONTINUED

Adding Oil Recommended Oil

Engine Oil

Maintenance 227

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL FFIILLLL CCAAPP

AAPPII CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN SSEEAALL

01/09/28 20:02:34 31SZ3660_230

－

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight as shownon the chart. When using syntheticoil, you must follow the oil and filterchange intervals given in themaintenance schedule.

The numbers on the container’s labeltell you the oil’s viscosity or weight.Select the oil for your car accordingto this chart.

An oil with a viscosity of 5W-30 ispreferred for optimum fuel economyand year-round protection in yourAcura. You may use a 10W-30 oil ifthe temperature in your area nevergoes below 20°F ( 7°C).

Your Acura does not need any oiladditives. Purchasing additives forthe engine or transmission will notincrease your car’s performance orlongevity. It only increases the costof operating your car.

Engine Oil

Maintenance

Synthetic Oil Additives

228

AAmmbbiieenntt TTeemmppeerraattuurree

01/09/28 20:02:42 31SZ3660_231

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the time and distance(miles/kilometers) recommenda-tions in the maintenance schedule.The oil and filter collect contami-nants that can damage your engine ifthey are not removed regularly.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Open the hood and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from your Acuradealer) is required to remove thefilter.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the car. The car shouldbe raised on a service station-typehydraulic lift for this service. Unlessyou have the knowledge and properequipment, you should have thismaintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Changing the Oil and Filter

Engine Oil

Maintenance 229

OOIILL FFIILLTTEERROOIILL DDRRAAIINN BBOOLLTT

WWAASSHHEERR

01/09/28 20:02:53 31SZ3660_232

Let the engine run for severalminutes and check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel. If necessary, add oil to bringthe level to the upper mark on thedipstick.

Install a new oil filter according toinstructions that come with it.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator light should go out withinfive seconds. If it does not, turn offthe engine and reinspect yourwork.

6.

7.

8.

9.

4.

5.

Engine Oil

Maintenance230

33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m)

4.9 US qt (4.6 , 4.0 Imp qt)

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmful to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

01/09/28 20:03:03 31SZ3660_233

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.The coolant you add should alwaysbe a mixture of 50 percent antifreezeand 50 percent water. Never addstraight antifreeze or plain water.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

Always use Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water. Itdoes not require any additionalmixing.

If it is not available, you may useanother major-brand non-silicatecoolant as a temporary replacement.Make sure it is a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.However, continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result incorrosion, causing the coolingsystem to malfunction or fail. Havethe cooling system flushed andrefilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

1.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance 231


Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

01/09/28 20:03:12 31SZ3660_234

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Put the radiator cap back on.Tighten it fully.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

Turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise, without pressing downon it, until it stops. This relievesany pressure remaining in thecooling system.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your car’s coolingsystem. They may not be compatiblewith the coolant or engine compo-nents.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Cooling System

Maintenance232


RRAADDIIAATTOORR CCAAPP

01/09/28 20:03:22 31SZ3660_235

Loosen the drain plug on thebottom of the radiator. Thecoolant will come out through thehole in the splash cover.

Turn the ignition ON (II). Turnthe heater temperature controldial to maximum heat (climatecontrol to 90°F/32°C). Turn offthe ignition. Open the hood. Makesure the engine and radiator arecool to the touch.

Remove the radiator cap.

The cooling system should becompletely drained and refilled withnew coolant according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule. Only useHonda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Use of any non-Honda coolant or plain water canresult in corrosion and deposits inthe cooling system.

Draining the coolant requires accessto the underside of the car. Unlessyou have the tools and knowledge,you should have this maintenancedone by a skilled mechanic.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Replacing Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance 233

DDRRAAIINN PPLLUUGG

01/09/28 20:03:32 31SZ3660_236

Remove the reserve tank from itsholder by pulling it straight up.Drain the coolant, then put thetank back in its holder.

When the coolant stops draining,tighten the drain plug at thebottom of the radiator.

Put the drain cap back in placetightly, then reinstall the clip onthe drain cap securely.

On the right side of the engineblock, remove the clip with a plier,and then remove the drain cap.

5.4.

6.

Cooling System

Maintenance234

CCLLIIPP

DDRRAAIINN CCAAPP RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK CCAAPP

RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK HHOOLLDDEERR

01/09/28 20:03:39 31SZ3660_237

Remove the two bolts and thethree nuts with a 7/16 in (10 mm)wrench, then remove the enginecover.

Loosen the bleeder bolt on top ofthe engine.

Pour Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2 intothe radiator up to the base of thefiller neck. This coolant is amixture of 50 percent antifreezeand 50 percent water. Pre-mixingis not required.The cooling system capacity is:

Tighten the bleeder bolt whencoolant comes out in a steadystream with no bubbles.

7. 8.

9.

10.

CONTINUED

Cooling System

Maintenance 235

BBOOLLTTSS

BBLLEEEEDDEERR BBOOLLTTNNUUTTSS

1.61 US gal (6.1 , 1.34 Imp gal)

01/09/28 20:03:50 31SZ3660_238

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it fully.

If necessary, fill the reserve tankto the MAX mark. Install thereserve tank cap.

Remove the radiator cap. Pourcoolant into the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck and into thereserve tank up to the MAX mark.

Start the engine and hold it at1,500 rpm until the cooling fancomes on. Turn off the engine.Check the coolant level in theradiator and add coolant if needed.

Install the engine cover. Firsttighten the two bolts on the frontof the engine cover, then tightenthe three nuts on the engine cover.Tightening torque:

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it to the first stop.

Start the engine and let it run untilthe radiator cooling fan comes onat least twice. Then stop theengine.Fill the reserve tank to the MAX

mark. Install the reserve tank cap.

Check the level in the radiator,add coolant if needed.

12.

11.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

Cooling System

Maintenance236

RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKKFFiillll uupp ttoo hheerree FFIILLLLEERR NNEECCKK

7 lbf·ft (9.8 N·m , 1.0 kgf·m)

01/09/28 20:04:03 31SZ3660_239

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

Check the level in the windshieldwasher reservoir at least monthlyduring normal usage. In bad weather,when you use the washers often,check the level every time you stopfor fuel.

The windshield washer reservoir islocated behind the driver’s sideheadlight.

Check the reservoir’s fluid level byremoving the cap and looking at thefloat. It should be up to the top of theneck. If the float is at the bottom ofthe neck, the reservoir is nearlyempty. When you refill the reservoir, clean

the edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

Windshield Washers

Maintenance 237

FFLLOOAATT

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir.

Antif reeze can damage your car’s paint,while a vinegar/water solution candamage the windshield washer pump.

Use only commercially-availablewindshield washer f luid.

01/09/28 20:04:10 31SZ3660_240

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick into thetransmission. Make sure the notchin the rubber cap fits in thedipstick guide and that you pushthe dipstick in all the way.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Park the car on level ground. Shutoff the engine.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the tube tobring it to the upper mark. Alwaysuse Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid). If it is notavailable, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

To thoroughly flush thetransmission, the technicianshould drain and refill it withHonda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid), then drivethe vehicle a short distance. Dothis three times. Then drain andrefill the transmission a final time.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Maintenance238

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK GGUUIIDDEE

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK

UUPPPPEERR MMAARRKKLLOOWWEERR MMAARRKK

01/09/28 20:04:21 31SZ3660_241

－－

Use a SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90viscosity hypoid gear oil, API serviceclassified GL4 or GL5 only, in thedifferential.

The differential oil should be drainedand refilled with new oil according tothe time and distance recommenda-tions in the maintenance schedule.

Viscosity

If it is not, slowly add oil until itstarts to run out of the hole. Reinstallthe filler plug and tighten it securely.

Check the oil in the differential withthe car sitting level. Remove the oilfiller plug and check that the oil levelis up to the edge of the hole.

Insert the dipstick back in thetransmission. Make sure the notchfits in the dipstick guide and thedipstick is down all the way.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

6.

Maintenance

Differential Oil

Automatic Transmission Fluid, Differential Oil

239

FFIILLLLEERR PPLLUUGGDDRRAAIINN PPLLUUGG

CCoorrrreeccttlleevveell

SAE 90: above 0°F ( 18°C)SAE 80W-90: below 0°F ( 18°C)

01/09/28 20:04:31 31SZ3660_242

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Check the fluid level in the brakefluid reservoir monthly.

The brake fluid should be replacedaccording to the time recommenda-tion in the maintenance schedule.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement. However, the use ofany non-Honda brake fluid can causecorrosion and decrease the life of thesystem. Have the brake systemflushed and refilled with HondaHeavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 assoon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your car’s brakingsystem and can cause extensivedamage.

You should check the fluid level inthe power steering reservoir at leastonce a year. Check the level whenthe engine is cold. Look at the sideof the reservoir. The fluid should bebetween the UPPER LEVEL andLOWER LEVEL. If it is below theLOWER LEVEL, add power steeringfluid to the UPPER LEVEL.

Brake System Power SteeringBrake Fluid

Maintenance

Brake Fluid, Power Steering

240

MMIINNMMAAXX

LLOOWWEERRLLEEVVEELL

UUPPPPEERRLLEEVVEELL

01/09/28 20:04:43 31SZ3660_243

The air cleaner element should becleaned or replaced according to thetime and distance recommendationsin the maintenance schedule.

Clean the air cleaner element byblowing compressed air through it inthe opposite direction to normal airflow. If you do not have access tocompressed air (such as a servicestation), ask your Acura dealer to dothis service.

Follow the replacement procedurefor removal and reinstallation.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. If it is not available, you mayuse another power steering fluid asan emergency replacement.However, continued use can causeincreased wear and poor steering incold weather. Have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible. Clean the hood latch assembly with a

mild cleaner, then lubricate it with amultipurpose grease. Lubricate allthe moving parts (as shown),including the pivot. Follow the timeand distance recommendations inthe Maintenance Schedule. If youare not sure how to clean and greasethe latch, contact your Acura dealer.

CONTINUED

Air Cleaner ElementHood Latch

Maintenance

Power Steering, Hood Latch, Air Cleaner Element

Cleaning (Severe Conditions)

241

PPIIVVOOTTSS

LLAATTCCHHAASSSSEEMMBBLLYY

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

01/09/28 20:04:54 31SZ3660_244

Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, snap the four hold-downclamps back into place.

Remove the old air cleanerelement.

Remove the air cleaner housingcover. Do not disconnect the airintake tube from the air cleanerhousing cover.

Unsnap the four clamps holdingthe air cleaner housing cover.

To replace it:

The air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing on the passenger’sside of the engine compartment.

Carefully clean the inside of theair cleaner housing with a damprag.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Air Cleaner Element

Maintenance

Replacement

242

AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERREELLEEMMEENNTT

CCLLAAMMPPSS

01/09/28 20:05:05 31SZ3660_245

Clean up any dirt and oil that havecollected around the ignition coils.

Remove the two bolts and the fournuts with a wrench and removethe tower bar. Then remove theA/C tube from the three clips.

Remove the two bolts and thethree nuts with a 7/16 inch (10mm) wrench, then remove theengine cover.

The spark plugs in your car are aspecial platinum-tipped design forlonger life. The spark plugs shouldbe replaced according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule.

1. 2.

3.

CONTINUED

Replacement

Spark Plugs

Maintenance 243

BBOOLLTTSS

NNUUTTSS

BBOOLLTTSSNNUUTTSSNNUUTTSS

01/09/28 20:05:17 31SZ3660_246

Put the new spark plug into thesocket, then screw it into the hole.Screw it in by hand so you do notcrossthread it.

Use a wrench to remove the twobolts holding the ignition coil.Remove the ignition coil by pullingit straight out.

Remove the spark plug witha five-eighths inch (16 mm) sparkplug socket.

Disconnect the wire connectorfrom the ignition coil by pushingon the lock tab and pulling on theconnector. Pull on the plasticconnector, not the wires.

4. 5.

6.

7.

Spark Plugs

Maintenance244

IIGGNNIITTIIOONN CCOOIILL

IIGGNNIITTIIOONN CCOOIILL

LLOOCCKK TTAABB

CCOONNNNEECCTTOORR BBOOLLTTSS

01/09/28 20:05:25 31SZ3660_247

Install the ignition coil. Reinstallthe two hold-down bolts.

Repeat this procedure for theother five spark plugs.

Torque the spark plug. (If you donot have a torque wrench, tightenthe spark plug two-thirds of a turnafter it contacts the cylinder head.)Tightening torque:

Put the A/C tube back in place.

Install the tower bar and tightenthe two bolts and the four nuts.Tightening torque:

Push the wire connector onto theignition coil. Make sure it locks inplace.

Install the engine cover. Firsttighten the two bolts on the frontof the engine cover, then tightenthe three nuts on the engine cover.Tightening torque:

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

CONTINUED

Spark Plugs

Maintenance 245

13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)

16 lbf·ft (22 N·m , 2.2 kgf·m)

7 lbf·ft (9.8 N·m , 1.0 kgf·m)

Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. Aspark plug that is too loose canoverheat and damage the engine.Overtightening can cause damage tothe threads in the cylinder head.

01/09/28 20:05:37 31SZ3660_248

＋－

Spark Plug Gap:

Check the battery condition bylooking at the test indicator windowon the battery.The label on the battery explains thetest indicator’s colors.

Check the condition of your car’sbattery monthly. You should checkthe color of the test indicator window,and for corrosion on the terminals.

NGK:DENSO:

BatterySpecifications:

Spark Plugs, Battery

Maintenance246

TTEESSTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR WWIINNDDOOWW

0.04 in (1.1 mm)

PFR5L-11PK16PR-L11

00.1 mm

01/09/28 20:05:46 31SZ3660_249

－

Check the battery terminals forcorrosion (a white or yellowishpowder). To remove it, cover theterminals with a solution of bakingsoda and water. It will bubble up andturn brown. When this stops, wash itoff with plain water. Dry off thebattery with a cloth or paper towel.Coat the terminals with grease tohelp prevent future corrosion.

If the terminals are severely cor-roded, clean them with baking sodaand water. Then use a wrench toloosen and remove the cables fromthe terminals. Always disconnect thenegative ( ) cable first and recon-nect it last. Clean the battery termi-nals with a terminal cleaning tool orwire brush. Reconnect and tightenthe cables, then coat the terminalswith grease.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damage to the car’selectrical system.

Battery posts,terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

CONTINUED

Battery

Maintenance

WARNING:

Wash hands after handling.

247

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

01/09/28 20:05:55 31SZ3660_250

Make sure the climate control sys-tem is off.

Start the engine and let it run untilit warms up (the radiator coolingfan comes on at least twice), andlet it idle for five more minutes.

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, the engine’s computerneeds to ‘‘relearn’’ the idle control.After replacing or recharging thebattery:

Your driver’s power window (seepage ) and your audio systemwill also disable itself when the bat-tery is disconnected or goes dead.The next time you turn on the radioyou will see ‘‘Code’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the Preset buttons to en-ter the five-digit code (see page ).

1.

2.

104

156

Battery

Maintenance248

Charging the battery with the cablesconnected can seriously damage yourcar’s electronic controls. Detach thebattery cables bef ore connecting thebattery to a charger.

01/09/28 20:06:01 31SZ3660_251

－

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Look for signs of cracking in therubber, or areas that are gettinghard. Replace the blades if you findthese signs, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold it in while youpush the blade assembly towardthe base of the arm.

To replace the blade:

Turn the ignition ON (II), switchthe wipers to INT or (lowposition), then turn the ignitionOFF when the wiper arm isapproximately midway in its travel.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades

Maintenance 249

WWIIPPEERR AARRMMSS LLOOCCKKTTAABB

01/09/28 20:06:10 31SZ3660_252

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metal rein-forcement along the back edge,remove the metal reinforcementstrips from the old wiper blade andinstall them in the slots along theedge of the new blade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Turn the ignition switch ON (II)and return the windshield wipersto their park position.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance250

BBLLAADDEE BBLLAADDEE

RREEIINNFFOORRCCEEMMEENNTT

01/09/28 20:06:18 31SZ3660_253

Run the air conditioning at least oncea week during the cold weathermonths. Run it for at least tenminutes while you are driving at asteady speed with the engine atnormal operating temperature. Thiscirculates the lubricating oil con-tained in the refrigerant.

If the air conditioning does not get ascold as before, have your dealercheck the system. Recharge thesystem with Refrigerant HFC-134a(R-134a). (See Specifications on page

.)

Periodically check the engine’sradiator and air conditioningcondenser for leaves, insects, anddirt stuck to the front surface. Theseblock the air flow and reduce coolingefficiency. Use a light spray from ahose or a soft brush to remove them.

Your car’s air conditioning is a sealedsystem. Any major maintenance,such as recharging, should be doneby a qualified mechanic. You can doa couple of things to make sure theair conditioning works efficiently. 312

Air Conditioning System

Maintenance 251

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG CCOONNDDEENNSSEERR

Whenever you have the air conditioningsystem serviced, make sure the servicef acility uses a ref rigerant recyclingsystem. This system captures theref rigerant f or reuse. Releasingref rigerant into the atmosphere candamage the environment.

The condenser and radiator f ins bendeasily. Only use a low-pressure sprayor sof t-bristle brush to clean them.

01/09/28 20:06:26 31SZ3660_254

－－

－－

－－

The belts should have the following‘‘play’’ or deflection.

Alternator belt:

Check the condition of the threedrive belts. Examine the edges ofeach belt for cracks or fraying.

This filter should be replaced every30,000 miles (48,000 km) under nor-mal conditions. It should be replacedevery 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if youdrive primarily in urban areas thathave high concentrations of soot inthe air from industry and diesel-pow-ered vehicles. Replace it more oftenif air flow from the climate controlsystem becomes less than usual.Have dust and pollen filter replacedby your Acura dealer.

Check the tension of each belt bypushing on it with your thumbmidway between the pulleys.

If you see signs of wear or looseness,have your dealer adjust or replacethe belts.

Power steering belt:

Compressor belt:

The dust and pollen filter removespollen and dust that is brought infrom the outside through the climatecontrol system.

Air Conditioning Filter Drive Belts

Air Conditioning Filter, Drive Belts

Maintenance252

PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGGBBEELLTT

AALLTTEERRNNAATTOORR BBEELLTT

CCOOMMPPRREESSSSOORR BBEELLTT

0.37 0.45 in (9.5 11.5 mm)

0.41 0.49 in (10.5 12.5 mm)

0.31 0.43 in (8.0 11.0 mm)

01/09/28 20:06:39 31SZ3660_255

－－We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

The timing belt and balancer beltshould normally be replaced at theintervals shown in the maintenanceschedule.

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).

To safely operate your car, your tiresmust be the proper type and size, ingood condition with adequate tread,and correctly inflated. The followingpages give more detailed informationon how and when to check airpressure, how to inspect your tiresfor damage and wear, and what to dowhen your tires need to be replaced.

Replace these belts at 60,000 miles(U.S.) or 100,000 km (Canada) if youregularly drive your car in one ormore of these conditions:

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort. Underinflated tires wearunevenly, adversely affect handlingand fuel economy, and are morelikely to fail from being overheated.Overinflated tires can make your carride more harshly, are more prone todamage from road hazards, and wearunevenly.

CONTINUED

InflationTiresTiming Belt

Timing Belt, Tires

Maintenance 253

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

01/09/28 20:06:49 31SZ3660_256

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure at least once a month. Eventires that are in good condition maylose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time you check all theother tires.

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions andspeeds. Tire pressures for highspeed driving are the same as fornormal driving.

These pressures are also given onthe tire information label on thedriver’s doorjamb.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

If you check the pressure when thetires are hot (the car has been drivenseveral miles), you will see readings4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreading. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the specified coldpressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

Check the pressure in the tires whenthey are cold. This means the carhas been parked for at least threehours. If you have to drive the carbefore checking the tire pressure,the tires can still be considered‘‘cold’’ if you drive less than 1 mile(1.6 km).

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal DrivingFront/Rear:

Recommended Tire Pressures forNormal Driving

Tires

Maintenance254

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1kgf/cm )

P225/55R16 94V

01/09/28 20:07:02 31SZ3660_257

Tubeless tires have some ability toself-seal if they are punctured.However, because leakage is oftenvery slow, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.Your car’s tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down to that point, youwill see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wideband running across the tread. Thisshows there is less than 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Atire that is this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see thetread wear indicator in three or moreplaces around the tire.

Inspection

Tires

Maintenance 255

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLOOCCAATTIIOONN MMAARRKKSS

TTRREEAADD WWEEAARR IINNDDIICCAATTOORRSS

01/09/28 20:07:12 31SZ3660_258

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

The tires were properly balanced bythe factory. They may need to berebalanced at some time before theyare worn out. Have your dealercheck the tires if you feel a consis-tent vibration while driving. A tireshould always be rebalanced if it isremoved from the wheel for repair. To help increase tire life and

distribute wear more evenly, youshould have the tires rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km). Move thetires to the positions shown in thechart each time they are rotated.

Make sure the installer balances thewheels when you have new tiresinstalled. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. Your car’soriginal tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’balanced at the factory. For bestresults, have the installer perform adynamic balance.

Maintenance Tire Rotation

Tires

Maintenance256

((FFoorr NNoonn--ddiirreeccttiioonnaallTTiirreess aanndd WWhheeeellss))

((FFoorr DDiirreeccttiioonnaallTTiirreess aanndd WWhheeeellss))

FFrroonntt FFrroonntt

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Genuine Acura wheel weights f orbalancing.

01/09/28 20:07:23 31SZ3660_259

When shopping for replacementtires, you may find that some tiresare ‘‘directional.’’ This means theyare designed to rotate only in onedirection. If you use directional tires,they should be rotated only front-to-back.

The tires that came with your carwere selected to match the perform-ance capabilities of the car whileproviding the best combination ofhandling, ride comfort, and long life.You should replace them with radialtires of the same size, load range,speed rating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall). Mixing radial andbias-ply tires on your car can reduceits braking ability, traction, andsteering accuracy. It is best to replace all four tires at

the same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, then replace the twofront tires or the two rear tires as apair. Replacing just one tire canseriously affect your car’s handling.

CONTINUED

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Tires

Maintenance 257

Installing improper tires on yourcar can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

01/09/28 20:07:29 31SZ3660_260

＋Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have anall-weather tread design. Theyshould be suitable for most winterdriving conditions. Tires withoutthese markings are designed foroptimum traction in dry conditions.They may not provide adequateperformance in winter driving.For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

Wheels:

Tires:

See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading.

If you ever need to replace a wheel,make sure you use an identical stylealuminum alloy wheel that originallycame on your Acura. Replacementwheels are available at your Acuradealer.

The ABS and VSA system work bycomparing the speed of the wheels.When replacing tires, use the samesize originally supplied with the car.Tire size and construction can affectwheel speed and may cause thesystem to work inconsistently. 314

Winter DrivingWheels and Tires

Tires

Maintenance258

16 x 7 JJ

P225/55R16 94V

01/09/28 20:07:38 31SZ3660_261

If you mount snow tires on yourAcura, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels to balanceyour car’s handling in all weatherconditions. Keep in mind the tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay not be as high as your car’soriginal equipment tires. You shoulddrive cautiously even when the roadsare clear. Check with the tire dealerfor maximum speed recommen-dations.

Because your Acura has limited tireclearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’cable-type traction devices on thefront tires. Use traction devices onlywhen required by driving conditionsor local laws. Make sure they are thecorrect size for your tires.

Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should notbe used. No matter how tight theyseem to be installed, they can comeinto contact with the body andsuspension, causing serious damage.

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions andmount them as tightly as you can.Drive slowly with them installed. Ifyou hear them coming in contactwith the body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Make sure the cables areinstalled tightly, and that they arenot contacting the brake lines orsuspension. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Snow Tires Tire Chains

Tires

Maintenance 259

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your car’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe car.

01/09/28 20:07:47 31SZ3660_262

Check the operation of your car’sexterior lights at least once a month.A burned out bulb can create anunsafe condition by reducing yourcar’s visibility and the ability tosignal your intentions to otherdrivers.

Lights

Maintenance260

FFRROONNTT FFOOGG LLIIGGHHTT

LLOOWW BBEEAAMM HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTT

TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL//PPAARRKKIINNGG LLIIGGHHTT

SSIIDDEE MMAARRKKEERR LLIIGGHHTT

HHIIGGHH BBEEAAMM HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTT

01/09/28 20:07:53 31SZ3660_263

Check the following:

Headlights (low and high beam)Fog lightsParking lightsTaillightsBrake lightsTurn signalsBack-up lightsHazard light functionLicense plate lightSide marker lightsHigh-mount brake lightDaytime running lights (Canadianmodels)

If you find any bulbs are burned out,replace them as soon as possible.Refer to the chart on page todetermine what type of replacementbulb is needed.

313

Lights

Maintenance 261

HHIIGGHH--MMOOUUNNTT BBRRAAKKEE LLIIGGHHTT

BBAACCKK--UUPP LLIIGGHHTT

LLIICCEENNSSEE PPLLAATTEELLIIGGHHTTSS

SSTTOOPP//TTAAIILL LLIIGGHHTTSS

TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL LLIIGGHHTT

01/09/28 20:08:00 31SZ3660_264

Halogen bulbs are used for the highbeam headlight bulbs. Whenreplacing a high beam headlight bulb,handle it by its base and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

Open the hood.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pulling theconnector straight back.

Remove the rubber weather sealby pulling on the tab.

The low beam headlight bulbs are atype of high voltage discharge tube.High voltage can remain in thecircuit even with the light switch offand the key removed. Because ofthis, you should not attempt toexamine or change a low beamheadlight bulb yourself. If a lowbeam headlight bulb fails, take thecar to your dealer to have it replaced.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your car was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk or pull a trailer, readjustmentmay be required. Adjustment of theheadlights should be performed byan Acura technician or otherqualified mechanic.

1.

2.

3.

Lights

Maintenance

Headlight Aiming

Replacing a High Beam HeadlightBulb

262

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,perspiration, or a scratch on the glasscan cause the bulb to overheat andshatter.

01/10/25 13:37:15 31SZ3660_265

→

Unclip the end of the hold-downwire from its slot. Pivot it out ofthe way and remove the bulb.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,making sure the bulb is right sideup and the nubs on the bulb basefit in the indentations in theheadlight assembly. Pivot the hold-down wire back in place and clipthe end into the slot.

Install the rubber seal over theback of the headlight assembly.Make sure it is right side up; it ismarked ‘‘ .’’

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb.Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Your car uses halogen fog lightbulbs. See page for informationon replacing a halogen bulb.

4.

5.

6.

7.

262

CONTINUED

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a Fog Light Bulb

263

WWEEAATTHHEERR SSEEAALL

CCOONNNNEECCTTOORR HHOOLLDD--DDOOWWNN WWIIRREE

BBUULLBB

01/09/28 20:08:17 31SZ3660_266

→

Put the light assembly into thebumper. Tighten the mountingbolt.

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb. Turn on the frontfog lights to test the new bulb.

Install the rubber seal over theback of the fog light assembly.Make sure it is right side up; it ismarked ‘‘ .’’

Use a wrench to loosen the lightassembly’s mounting bolt.

Remove the light assembly fromthe bumper.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pulling theconnector straight back.

Remove the rubber weather sealby pulling on the tab.

Unclip the end of the hold-downwire from its slot. Pivot the wireout of the way and remove thebulb.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,making sure the bulb is right sideup and the nubs on the bulb basefit in the indentations in the foglight assembly. Pivot the hold-down wire back in place and clipthe end into the slot.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Lights

Maintenance264

WWEEAATTHHEERR SSEEAALL

BBOOLLTT

CCOONNNNEECCTTOORR

BBUULLBB

HHOOLLDD--DDOOWWNN WWIIRREE

01/09/28 20:08:29 31SZ3660_267

To remove the front turn signal/parking light bulb, push it inslightly and turn itcounterclockwise. To remove theside marker bulb, pull it straightout of its socket.

Install the new bulb into thesocket.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the inner fender cover back.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the holding clip from theinner fender.

If you are changing the bulb onthe driver’s side, start the engine,turn the steering wheel all the wayto the right, and turn off theengine. If you are changing thebulb on the passenger’s side, turnthe steering wheel to the left.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install the holding clip. Lock it inplace by pushing on the center.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

1. 2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing Front Turn Signal/Parking and Side Marker LightBulbs

265

HHOOLLDDIINNGG CCLLIIPP

01/09/28 20:08:43 31SZ3660_268

Open the trunk.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.


Undo the fastener on the side ofthe trunk lining by pushing on thecenter of the fastener’s head untilit pops in. Pull the lining back. Remove the socket by turning it

one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Determine which of the four bulbsis burned out: stop/taillights, back-up light, or turn signal.

Reinstall the trunk lining. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk seal.1.

3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Replacing Rear Bulbs

Lights

Maintenance266

FFAASSTTEENNEERR

01/09/28 20:08:54 31SZ3660_269

Open the trunk and remove thesocket from the light assembly byturning it one-quarter turn counter-clockwise.

Reset the fastener by pushing onthe pointed end until it pops backalmost flush with the fingers onthe housing.

Put the fastener in the hole in theside of the trunk lining and pushon the center until it locks (thecenter is flush with the head).

Reinstall the socket. Turn itclockwise until it locks.

Install the new bulb in the socket.

Remove the bulb by pushing it inslightly and turning it counter-clockwise.


1.

2.

8.

9.

3.

4.

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Lights

Maintenance 267

01/09/28 20:09:06 31SZ3660_270

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb in untilit bottoms in the socket.

Put the lens back on the bulbholder and push it until it latches.

Slide the right side of the lightassembly into the hole. Push onthe left side to latch the assemblyinto place.

Turn on the parking lights andcheck that the new bulb isworking.

Remove the license light assemblyby carefully prying on the leftedge of the lens with a flat-tipscrewdriver and pulling theassembly out.

Remove the lens from the bulbholder by pulling the lens whilesqueezing the tabs on both sidesof the holder.

1. 2.

3.

5.

4.

6.

Replacing a Rear License PlateBulb

Lights

Maintenance268

LLIIGGHHTT AASSSSEEMMBBLLYY BBUULLBB HHOOLLDDEERR

BBUULLBB

LLEENNSS

01/09/28 20:09:17 31SZ3660_271

Remove the lens by carefullyprying on the edge of the lens witha fingernail file or a small flat-tipscrewdriver. Do not pry on theedge of the housing around thelens.

Door light:Pry on the top middle of the lens.

Front ceiling light:Pry on the front edge of the lensin the middle.

Rear ceiling light:Pry on the rear edge of the lensin the middle. Remove the bulbcover by pulling it straight down.

The courtesy lights in the doors androof come apart the same way. Theydo not use the same type of bulb.

Vanity mirror light:Pry on the top middle of the lens.

1.

CONTINUED

Replacing Bulbs in the InteriorCourtesy Lights

Maintenance

Lights

269

DDOOOORR LLIIGGHHTT FFRROONNTT RREEAARR

01/09/28 20:09:30 31SZ3660_272

Remove the lens by carefullyprying on the edge of the lens inthe middle with a fingernail file ora small flat-tip screwdriver. Do notpry on the edge of the housingaround the lens.

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

Push the new bulb into the metaltabs. Snap the lens back in place.

Push the new bulb into the metaltabs. Snap the lens back in place.

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

1.

2.

3.

2.

3.

Replacing the Trunk Light Bulb

Maintenance

Lights

270

TTRRUUNNKKVVAANNIITTYY MMIIRRRROORR LLIIGGHHTT

01/09/28 20:09:39 31SZ3660_273

Block the rear wheels.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter(see page ).

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc. arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Park.

If you need to park your car for anextended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your car back on the road. Ifpossible, store your car indoors.

If the car is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe car is being stored indoors).

Cover the car with a ‘‘breathable’’cover, one made from a porousmaterial such as cotton.Nonporous materials, such asplastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

If possible, run the engine for awhile periodically (preferably oncea month).

If you store your car for 12 monthsor longer, have your Acura dealerperform the inspections called for inthe 24 months/30,000 miles (48,000km) maintenance schedule (NormalConditions) as soon as you take itout of storage (see page ). Thereplacements called for in themaintenance schedule are notneeded unless the car has actuallyreached that time or mileage.

229

218

Maintenance

Storing Your Car

271

01/09/28 20:09:53 31SZ3660_274

272

01/09/28 20:09:55 31SZ3660_275

Regular cleaning and polishing ofyour Acura helps to keep it ‘‘new’’looking. This section gives you hintson how to clean your car andpreserve its appearance: the paint,brightwork, wheels and interior. Alsoincluded are several things you cando to help prevent corrosion.

.................................Exterior Care . 274.....................................Washing . 274

.......................................Waxing . 275....................Aluminum Wheels . 275

..........................Paint Touch-up . 275..................................Interior Care . 276...................................Carpeting . 276.................................Floor Mats . 276

.........................................Fabric . 277...........................................Vinyl . 277

.......................................Leather . 277...................................Seat Belts . 277

................................Wood Trim . 278....................................Windows . 278

..........................Air Fresheners . 278....................Corrosion Protection . 279

.................................Body Repairs . 280

Appearance Care

Appearance Care 273

01/09/28 20:10:00 31SZ3660_276

When you have washed and rinsedthe whole exterior, dry it with achamois or soft towel. Letting itair-dry will cause dulling and waterspots.

Fill a bucket with cool water. Mixin a mild detergent, such asdishwashing liquid or a productmade especially for car washing.

Only use the solvents and cleanersrecommended in this Owner’sManual.

Wash your car in a shady area, not indirect sunlight. If the car is parked inthe sun, move it into the shade andlet the exterior cool down before youstart.

Wash the car using the water anddetergent solution and a soft-bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.Start at the top and work your waydown. Rinse frequently.

Frequent washing helps preserveyour car’s beauty. Dirt and grit canscratch the paint, while tree sap andbird droppings can permanently ruinthe finish.

Rinse the car thoroughly with coolwater to remove loose dirt.

As you dry the car, inspect it forchips and scratches that could allowcorrosion to start. Repair them withtouch-up paint (see page ).

Check the body for road tar, treesap, etc. Remove these stains withtar remover or turpentine. Rinse itoff immediately so it does notharm the finish. Remember to re-wax these areas, even if the rest ofthe car does not need waxing.

275

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Washing

274

Chemical solvents and strong cleanerscan damage the paint, metal, andplastic on your car.

01/09/28 20:10:11 31SZ3660_277

－

－

You should use a quality liquid orpaste wax. Apply it according to theinstructions on the container. Ingeneral, there are two types ofproducts:

Waxes A wax coats the finish andprotects it from damage by exposureto sunlight, air pollution, etc. Youshould use a wax on your Acurawhen it is new.

Polishes Polishes and cleaner/waxes can restore the shine to paintthat has oxidized and lost some of itsshine. They normally contain mildabrasives and solvents that removethe top layer of the finish. You

should use a polish on your Acura ifthe finish does not have its originalshine after using a wax.

Clean your Acura’s aluminum alloywheels as you do the rest of theexterior. Wash them with the samesolution, and rinse them thoroughly.

The wheels have a protective clear-coat that keeps the aluminum fromcorroding and tarnishing. Usingharsh chemicals, including somecommercial wheel cleaners, or stiffbrushes can damage this clear-coat.Only use a mild detergent and softbrush or sponge to clean the wheels.

Your dealer has touch-up paint tomatch your vehicle’s color. The colorcode is printed on a sticker on thedriver’s doorjamb. Take this code toyour dealer so you are sure to getthe correct color.

Always wash and dry the whole carbefore waxing it. You should waxyour car, including the metal trim,whenever water sits on the surfacein large patches. It should form intobeads or droplets after waxing.

Cleaning tar, insects, etc. withremovers also takes off the wax.Remember to re-wax those areas,even if the rest of the car does notneed waxing. Inspect your car frequently for chips

or scratches in the paint. Repairthem right away to prevent corrosionof the metal underneath. Use thetouch-up paint only on small chipsand scratches. More extensive paintdamage should be repaired by aprofessional.

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Waxing

Aluminum Wheels

Paint Touch-up

275

01/09/28 20:10:23 31SZ3660_278

Vacuum the carpeting frequently toremove dirt. Ground-in dirt will makethe carpet wear out faster.Periodically shampoo the carpet tokeep it looking new. Use one of thefoam-type carpet cleaners on themarket. Follow the instructions thatcome with the cleaner, applying itwith a sponge or soft brush. Keepthe carpeting as dry as possible bynot adding water to the foam.

If you remove the floor mat, makesure to re-anchor it when you put itback in your car.

If you replace it, use a genuine Acurafloor mat that is designed to be usedwith the floor mat anchor in your car.

If you use a non-Acura floor mat inthe driver’s footwell, make sure itfits properly and that it can be usedwith the floor mat anchor.

Do not put additional floor mats ontop of the anchored mat, otherwisethe additional mats may slideforward and interfere with the pedals.

The genuine Acura driver’s floor matthat came with your car wasdesigned to be hooked over the floormat anchor. This keeps the floor matfrom sliding forward and possiblyinterfering with the pedals.

Carpeting Floor Mats

Appearance Care

Interior Care

276

01/09/28 20:10:32 31SZ3660_279

Remove dirt and dust with a vacuumcleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a softcloth dampened in a solution of mildsoap and water. Use the samesolution with a soft-bristle brush onmore difficult spots. You can also usecommercially-available spray orfoam-type vinyl cleaners.

Vacuum dirt and dust from theleather frequently. Pay particularattention to the pleats and seams.Clean the leather with a soft clothdampened with clear water, thenbuff it with a clean, dry cloth. Iffurther cleaning is needed, use asoap specifically for leather, such assaddle soap. Apply this soap with adamp, soft cloth. Wipe down andbuff as described above.

If your seat belts get dirty, you canuse a soft brush with a mixture ofmild soap and warm water to cleanthem. Do not use bleach, dye, orcleaning solvents. They can weakenthe belt material. Let the belts air-dry before you use the car.

Vacuum dirt and dust out of thematerial frequently. For generalcleaning, use a solution of mild soapand lukewarm water, letting it air dry.To clean off stubborn spots, use acommercially-available fabric cleaner.Test it on a hidden area of the fabricfirst, to make sure it does not bleachor stain the fabric. Follow theinstructions that come with thecleaner.

CONTINUED

Vinyl

Leather

Seat BeltsFabric

Interior Care

Appearance Care 277

LLOOOOPP

01/09/28 20:10:43 31SZ3660_280

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

Clean the windows, inside and out,with a commercially-available glasscleaner. You can also use a mixtureof one part white vinegar to ten partswater. This will remove the haze thatbuilds up on the inside of thewindows. Use a soft cloth or papertowels to clean all glass and clearplastic surfaces. If you use a liquid air freshener,

make sure you fasten it securely so itdoes not spill as you drive.

Clean the wood trim with a soft clothdipped in clear water and wipe it drywith another soft cloth. Soap mayleave a film that dulls the finish.

If you want to use an air freshener/deodorizer in the interior of your car,it is best to use a solid type. Someliquid air fresheners contain chemi-cals that may cause parts of theinterior trim and fabric to crack ordiscolor.

Windows Air Fresheners

Wood Trim

Interior Care

Appearance Care278

The rear window defogger andantenna wires are bonded to the insideof the glass. Wiping vigorously up-and-down can dislodge and break thesewires. When cleaning the rear window,use gentle pressure and wipe side-to-side.

01/09/28 20:10:53 31SZ3660_281

Moisture trapped in body cavities.Dirt and road salt that collects inhollows on the underside of thevehicle stays damp, promotingcorrosion in that area.

Repair chips and scratches in thepaint as soon as you discover them.

Inspect and clean out the drainholes in the bottom of the doorsand body.

Check the floor coverings fordampness. Carpeting and floormats may remain damp for a longtime, especially in winter. Thisdampness can eventually causethe floor panels to corrode.

Two factors normally contribute tocausing corrosion in your car:

Many corrosion-preventive measuresare built into your Acura. You canhelp keep your car from corrodingby performing some simple periodicmaintenance:

Use a high-pressure spray to cleanthe underside of your car. This isespecially important in areas thatuse road salt in winter. It is also agood idea in humid climates andareas subject to salt air. Be carefulof the ABS wheel sensors andwiring at each wheel.

Have the corrosion-preventivecoatings on the underside of yourcar inspected and repairedperiodically.

Removal of paint and protectivecoatings from the exterior andunderside of the car.

1.

2.

Corrosion Protection

Appearance Care 279

01/09/28 20:11:02 31SZ3660_282

Make sure the repair facility usesgenuine Acura replacement bodyparts. Some companies make sheetmetal pieces that seem to duplicatethe original Acura body parts, butare actually inferior in fit, finish, andcorrosion resistance. Once installed,they do not give the same high-quality appearance.

Take your car to your authorizedAcura dealer for inspection after therepairs are completed. Your dealercan make sure that quality materialswere used, and that corrosion-preventive coatings were applied toall repaired and replaced parts.

When reporting your collision to theinsurance company, tell them youwant genuine Acura parts used in therepair. Although most insurersrecognize the quality of originalparts, some may try to specify thatthe repairs be done with otheravailable parts. You should investi-gate this before any repairs havebegun.

Body repairs can affect your car’sresistance to corrosion. If your carneeds repairs after a collision, payclose attention to the parts used inthe repair and the quality of thework.

Body Repairs

Appearance Care280

01/09/28 20:11:08 31SZ3660_283

This section covers the more-common problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your car towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 282....................Changing a Flat Tire . 283

..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 288Nothing Happens or the

Starter Motor Operates........................Very Slowly . 288

The Starter Operates................................Normally . 289................................Jump Starting . 290

............If Your Engine Overheats . 293.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 295..........Charging System Indicator . 296

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 297...............Brake System Indicator . 299

..................Closing the Moonroof . 300..............................................Fuses . 301

..........Checking and Replacing . 302......................Emergency Towing . 306

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking Care of the Unexpected 281

01/09/28 20:11:13 31SZ3660_284

Follow these precautions wheneveryou are using the compact spare tire:

The compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular tire. Replaceit when you can see the tread wearindicator bars. The replacementshould be the same size and designtire, mounted on the same wheel.The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the compact wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)under any circumstances.

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces than the regular tire. Usegreater caution while driving onthis tire.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare.

Your car has a compact spare tirethat takes up less space. Use thisspare tire as a temporary replace-ment only. Get your regular tirerepaired or replaced and put it backon your car as soon as you can.

The wheel of the compact sparetire is designed especially to fityour car. Do not use your sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Turn off the VSA system (seepage ).Driving with the compact sparetire may activate the VSA system.

202

Compact Spare Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected282

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLOOCCAATTIIOONN MMAARRKK

TTRREEAADD WWEEAARR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR BBAARR60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

01/09/28 20:11:25 31SZ3660_285

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Stopping in traffic or on the shoulderof a busy road is dangerous. Driveslowly along the shoulder until youget to an exit or an area to stop thatis far away from the traffic lanes.

Open the trunk. Raise the trunkfloor by lifting up on the back edge.To keep the trunk floor out of theway, attach the hook into the slotin the trunk lid.

Take the tool kit out of the trunk.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

Turn on the hazard warning lightsand turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0). Have all thepassengers get out of the car whileyou change the tire.

Park the car on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground away fromtraffic. Put the transmission inPark. Apply the parking brake.

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire


TTRRUUNNKK FFLLOOOORR

SSPPAARREE TTIIRREEJJAACCKK TTOOOOLL KKIITT

HHOOOOKK

The car can easily roll off thejack, seriously injuring anyoneunderneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the car when itis supported only by the jack.

01/09/28 20:11:37 31SZ3660_286

△

Turn the jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack by lifting itstraight up.

Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2turn with the wheel wrench.

Locate the jacking point nearestthe tire you need to change. It ispointed to by a mark moldedinto the underside of the body.Place the jack under the jackingpoint. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

6. 7. 8.



284

JJAACCKK

WWHHEEEELL WWRREENNCCHH

JJAACCKKIINNGGPPOOIINNTT

01/09/28 20:11:46 31SZ3660_287

CONTINUED

Use the extension and wheelwrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts and flattire. Temporarily place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface of the wheel facing up.You could scratch the wheel if youput it face down.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully, it may be hot fromdriving.

9. 10. 11.



BBRRAAKKEE HHUUBBWWHHEEEELLWWRREENNCCHH

EEXXTTEENNSSIIOONN

01/09/28 20:11:55 31SZ3660_288

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Lower the car to the ground andremove the jack.

12. 13. 14.



286

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

01/09/28 20:12:03 31SZ3660_289

CONTINUED

Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.

Remove the spacer basket fromthe trunk well.

Wrap the spacer cone and sparetire wing bolt with cloth or paperand store them in the trunk well.

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

15. 16. 17.

18.



SSPPAACCEERR BBAASSKKEETT CCEENNTTEERR CCAAPP

FFLLAATT TTIIRREE

WWIINNGG BBOOLLTT

SSPPAACCEERRCCOONNEE

RRIINNGG

01/09/28 20:12:14 31SZ3660_290

Diagnosing why your engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.The transmission must be in Parkor Neutral or the starter will notoperate.

Slip the hole at the top of the jackover the bracket in the trunk well.Turn the jack’s end bracket to lockit in place. Store the tool kit backin its place.

Close the trunk lid.

Store the center cap and spacerbasket in the trunk. Make sure thecenter cap will not get scratchedor damaged.

Unclip the hook from the trunk lidand lower the trunk floor.

Your car has the ImmobilizerSystem. You should use aproperly-coded master or valet keyto start the engine (see page ).A key that is not properly codedwill cause the immobilizer systemindicator in the dash panel to blinkrapidly.

19.

20.

21.

22.

75

Changing a Flat Tire, If Your Engine Won’t Start


If Your Engine Won’t Start Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

288

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

01/09/28 20:12:29 31SZ3660_291

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or don’t light at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to START(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there is proba-bly something wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. (See

on page .)

Do you have fuel? Turn theignition switch to ON (II) for aminute and watch the fuel gauge.The low fuel level warning lightmay not be working, so you werenot reminded to fill the tank.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the car froma booster battery (see page ).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

290

306

246

290

191

302

306

If Your Engine Won’t Start


Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

EmergencyTowing

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

289

01/09/28 20:12:40 31SZ3660_292

You cannot start your Acura bypushing or pulling it.

Open the hood and check thephysical condition of the battery(see page ). In very coldweather, check the condition ofthe electrolyte. If it seems slushyor like ice, do not try jump startinguntil it thaws.

If your car’s battery has run down,you may be able to start the engineby using a booster battery. Althoughthis seems like a simple procedure,you should take several precautions.

To jump start your car, follow thesedirections closely:

1.

246

Jump Starting


A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

01/09/28 20:12:47 31SZ3660_293

－＋

＋

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the ground wire onthe right side of the engine asshown. Do not connect this jumpercable to any other part of theengine.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourAcura’s battery. Connect the otherend to the positive ( ) terminalon the booster battery.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: climate control, stereosystem, lights, etc.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.

5.

4.3.

2.

CONTINUED


Jump Starting

291

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

01/09/28 20:12:56 31SZ3660_294

Start your car. If the starter motorstill operates slowly, check thejumper cable connections to makesure they have good metal-to-metal contact.

Once your car is running, discon-nect the negative cable from yourcar, then from the booster battery.Disconnect the positive cable fromyour car, then the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the car until all are disconnected.Otherwise, you may cause anelectrical short.

6.

7.

Jump Starting


BBOOOOSSTTEERR BBAATTTTEERRYY

01/09/28 20:13:03 31SZ3660_295

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading(climbing a long, steep hill on ahot day with the A/C running, forexample), the engine should startto cool down almost immediately.If it does, wait until the tempera-ture gauge comes down to the mid-point then continue driving.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark and set the parking brake.Turn off the climate control and allother accessories. Turn on thehazard warning indicators.

The pointer of your car’s tempera-ture gauge should stay in the mid-range under most conditions. It maygo higher if you are driving up a longsteep hill on a very hot day. If itclimbs to the red mark, you shoulddetermine the reason.

Your car can overheat for severalreasons, such as lack of coolant or amechanical problem. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.In either case, you should takeimmediate action.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

If Your Engine Overheats


Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

01/09/28 20:13:13 31SZ3660_296

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Wait until you see no more signsof steam or spray, then open thehood.

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

). If the level is below theMIN mark, add coolant to halfwaybetween the MIN and MAX marks.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may also have toadd coolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointer

reaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. Thisreleases any remaining pressure inthe cooling system. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap and turn it until it comesoff.

Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum (climate control toFULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Addcoolant to the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck. If you donot have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair. (See

on page .)

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

12.

11.306

182 306

EmergencyTowing

EmergencyTowing

If Your Engine Overheats


Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

01/09/28 20:13:24 31SZ3660_297

Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If the lightdoes not go out within ten seconds,turn off the engine. There is amechanical problem that needs tobe repaired before you cancontinue driving. (See

on page .)Safely pull off the road and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. It shouldnever come on when the engine isrunning. If it starts flashing, itindicates that the oil pressuredropped very low for a moment, thenrecovered. If the indicator stays onwith the engine running, it showsthat the engine has lost oil pressureand serious engine damage ispossible. In either case, you shouldtake immediate action.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Let the car sit for a minute. Openthe hood and check the oil level(see page ). Although oil leveland oil pressure are not directlyconnected, an engine that is verylow on oil can lose pressure duringcornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

1.

2.

3.

4.

181

227

306Emergency

Towing

Low Oil Pressure Indicator


LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREE IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe car stopped.

01/09/28 20:13:33 31SZ3660_298

By eliminating as much of theelectrical load as possible, you candrive several miles (kilometers)before the battery is too dischargedto keep the engine running. Drive toa service station or garage whereyou can get technical assistance.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories: radio, climate control,rear defogger, cruise control, etc.Try not to use other electrically-operated controls such as the powerwindows. Keep the engine runningand take extra care not to stall it.Starting the engine will dischargethe battery rapidly.

This indicator should come on whenthe ignition switch is ON (II), and goout after the engine starts. If itcomes on brightly when the engineis running, it indicates that thecharging system has stoppedcharging the battery.

Charging System Indicator


CCHHAARRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/09/28 20:13:39 31SZ3660_299

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates one of theengine’s emissions control systemsmay have a problem. Even thoughyou may feel no difference in yourcar’s performance, it can reduceyour fuel economy and cause yourcar to put out excessive emissions.Continued operation may causeserious damage.

If the indicator remains on past threedriving trips, or the fuel cap was notloose or missing, have the carchecked by the dealer as soon aspossible. Drive moderately until thedealer has inspected the problem.Avoid full-throttle acceleration anddriving at high speed.

You should also have the dealerinspect your car if this indicatorcomes on repeatedly, even though itmay turn off as you continue driving.

If you have recently refueled yourcar, the cause of this indicatorcoming on could be a loose ormissing fuel fill cap. Check the capand tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. Replace the fuel fill cap if it ismissing. Tightening the cap will notmake the indicator turn offimmediately; it takes at least threedriving trips.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp


MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLAAMMPP

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your car’s emissions controlsand engine. Those repairs may not becovered by your car’s warranties.

01/09/28 20:13:47 31SZ3660_300

Your car has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If your car’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It takes severaldays of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

If possible, do not take your car for astate emissions test until thereadiness codes are set. See StateEmissions Testing on pages and

.322321

Malfunction Indicator Lamp


Readiness Codes

298

01/09/28 20:13:53 31SZ3660_301

＊＊

＊＊

If you must drive the car a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and cautiously.

If it comes on at any other time, itindicates a problem with the car’sbrake system. In most cases, theproblem is a low fluid level in thebrake fluid reservoir. Press lightly onthe brake pedal to see if it feelsnormal. If it does, check the brakefluid level the next time you stop at aservice station (see page ). If thefluid level is low, take the car to yourdealer and have the brake systeminspected for leaks or worn brakepads.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of thelonger distance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the car. Youshould have it towed, and repaired assoon as possible. (See

on page .)

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. Because of thebrake system’s dual-circuit design, aproblem in one part of the systemwill still give you braking at twowheels. You will feel the brake pedalgo down much farther before the carbegins to slow down, and you willhave to press harder on the pedal.The distance needed to stop will bemuch longer.

If the ABS indicator and the VSAsystem indicator come on with thisindicator, have the car inspected byyour dealer immediately.

The Brake System Indicatornormally comes on when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to check the parking brake.It comes on and stays lit if you do notfully release the parking brake.

240306

Brake System Indicator


EmergencyTowing

299

BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

UU..SS.. iinnddiiccaattoorr sshhoowwnn

01/09/28 20:14:02 31SZ3660_302

If the electric motor will not closethe moonroof, do the following:

Check the fuse for the moonroofmotor (see page ). If the fuseis blown, replace it with one of thesame or lower rating.

Try closing the moonroof. If thenew fuse blows immediately or themoonroof motor still does notoperate, you can close themoonroof manually.

Insert the moonroof wrench intothe socket behind this plug. Turnthe wrench until the moonroof isfully closed.

Remove the wrench. Replace theplug and lens.

Remove the lens from the rearceiling light (see page ).

Get the moonroof wrench out ofthe tool kit in the trunk.

Remove the plug in the center ofthe rear ceiling light.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5. 6.

7.

302

269

Closing the Moonroof


SSOOCCKKEETT

PPLLUUGG

01/09/28 20:14:14 31SZ3660_303

The under-hood fuse box is locatedin the engine compartment next tothe battery. To open it, push the tabas shown.

The interior fuse box is underneaththe dashboard on the driver’s side.To open it, turn the knob as shown.

All the electrical circuits in your carhave fuses to protect them from ashort circuit or overload. Thesefuses are located in two fuse boxes.

Fuses


KKNNOOBB

UUNNDDEERR--HHOOOODD TTAABBIINNTTEERRIIOORR

01/09/28 20:14:22 31SZ3660_304

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-head screw-driver.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller provided in the door of theinterior fuse box.Remove the cover from the fuse

box.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

If something electrical in your carstops working, the first thing youshould check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that component. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isnot the cause. Replace any blownfuses and check the component’soperation.

3.1.

2.

4.

304 305

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses


BBLLOOWWNN

FFUUSSEEPPUULLLLEERR

FFUUSSEE

01/09/28 20:14:33 31SZ3660_305

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

If you cannot drive the car withoutfixing the problem, and you do nothave a spare fuse, take a fuse of thesame rating or a lower rating fromone of the other circuits. Make sureyou can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the cigarettelighter or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your car.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit and have your car checkedby a qualified mechanic.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘Code’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the Preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page

).

5.

6.

156

CONTINUED

Fuses


BBLLOOWWNN

Replacing a fuse with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have a replace-ment f use with the proper rating f or thecircuit, install one with a lower rating.

01/09/28 20:14:42 31SZ3660_306

－

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected

123456789101112131415

20 A10 A20 A15 A20 A20 A20 A20 A20 A10 A10 A20 A30 A30 A

Not UsedStop, HornHazardDriver Power WindowTCSVSAPower Door LockRight Headlight LowLeft Headlight LowCooling FanLeft Headlight HighRight Headlight HighCondenser FanMoonroofFront Passenger’s PowerSeat

1617

1819202122232425262728

20 A20 A

15 A7.5 A20 A30 A50 A40 A40 A

120 A40 A40 A50 A

Front Fog LightETS (Electrical Tilt/Telescope Steering)MeterBack-up, RadioInterior LightsWiper MotorIgnition SwitchPower WindowHeater MotorBatteryVSA MotorRear Window DefoggerFuse box

Fuses


UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

01/09/28 20:14:52 31SZ3660_307

＊

＊－

－

＊ On Canadian models

123

45678910111213

Small LightNot Used (OP)Rear Window DefoggerRelay, Cooling Fan RelayRadio, ACCA/C Clutch, Heated SeatECU (PCM)SRSDriver’s Power SeatBose Audio SystemDaytime Running LightsDriver’s Power SeatDaytime Running LightsMeter, Moonroof

14151617181920212223242526

7.5 A7.5 A10 A7.5 A20 A7.5 A20 A20 A20 A7.5 A20 A30 A

15 A

7.5 A

10 A20 A20 A10 A20 A20 A10 A20 A7.5 A7.5 A

Starter SignalACGACC SocketPower Window MPCSFront Right Power WindowMirrorECU (Body)Rear Right Power WindowFuel PumpSRSRear Left Power WindowIgnition CoilsNot Used

1 :

No. Circuits Protected No. Amps.Amps. Circuits Protected

1

1

Fuses


INTERIOR FUSE BOX

01/09/28 20:15:01 31SZ3660_308

－

－

－

There are three popular types ofprofessional towing equipment.

If your car needs to be towed, call aprofessional towing service or, if youbelong to one, an organization thatprovides roadside assistance. Nevertow your car behind another vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

The operatorloads your car on the back of a truck.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front or rear) and liftthem off the ground. The other twotires remain on the ground.

The towtruck uses metal cables with hookson the ends. These hooks go aroundparts of the frame or suspension andthe cables lift that end of the car offthe ground. Your car’s suspensionand body can be seriously damaged.

If your Acura cannot be transportedby flat-bed, it should be towed bywheel-lift equipment with the frontwheels off the ground. If, due todamage, your car must be towedwith the front wheels on the ground,do the following.

Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to Neutral.

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the car no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

Sling-type Equipment

This is the best way to transportyour Acura.

This isan acceptable way to tow yourAcura.

This method of towing isunacceptable.

Emergency Towing


Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine, your car must be transportedwith the f ront wheels of f the ground.

01/09/28 20:15:12 31SZ3660_309

If you decide to tow your car with allfour wheels on the ground, makesure you use a properly-designed andattached tow bar. Prepare the car fortowing as described above, and leavethe ignition switch in Accessory (I)so the steering wheel does not lock.Make sure the radio and any itemsplugged into the accessory powersocket are turned off so they do notrun down the battery.

Emergency Towing


Trying to lif t or tow your car by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the car’s weight.

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in Accessory (I), andmake sure the steering wheel turnsf reely bef ore you begin towing.

01/09/28 20:15:17 31SZ3660_310

308

01/09/28 20:15:20 31SZ3660_311

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour Acura, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 310................................Specifications . 312

DOT Tire Quality Grading.............................(U.S. Cars) . 314

.................................Treadwear . 314......................................Traction . 314

.............................Temperature . 315.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 316

......Driving in Foreign Countries . 317

.......................Emissions Controls . 318.....................The Clean Air Act . 318

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 318

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 318

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 318

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 319....................PGM-FI System . 319

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 319

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 319

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 319

....................Replacement Parts . 319..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 320

..............State Emissions Testing . 321

Technical Information

Technical Information 309

01/09/28 20:15:25 31SZ3660_312

＊

Your car has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourAcura dealer uses to register yourcar for warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour car. The easiest place to findthe VIN is on a plate fastened to thetop of the dashboard. You can see itby looking through the windshieldon the driver’s side. It is also on theCertification label attached to thedriver’s doorjamb, and is stamped onthe engine compartment bulkhead.The VIN is also provided in bar codeon the Certification label.

Identif ication Numbers

Technical Information310

VVEEHHIICCLLEE IIDDEENNTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR

CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN LLAABBEELL

The U.S. car model

01/09/28 20:15:31 31SZ3660_313

The Engine Number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the frontleft, below the valve cover.

The Transmission Number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

Identif ication Numbers


TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR

EENNGGIINNEE NNUUMMBBEERR

01/09/28 20:15:36 31SZ3660_314

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊


Specifications

312

Dimensions

Weights

Air Conditioning

Capacities

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity:

4.5 US qt (4.3 , 3.8 Imp qt)

196.7 in (4,995 mm)71.7 in (1,820 mm)54.5 in (1,385 mm)114.6 in (2,910 mm)61.0 in (1,550 mm)60.6 in (1,540 mm)

HFC-134a (R-134a)24.7 26.5 oz (700 750 g)

ND-OIL8

18.0 US gal (68 , 15.0 Imp gal)1.61 US gal (6.1 , 1.34 Imp gal)2.27 US gal (8.6 , 1.89 Imp gal)

4.9 US qt (4.6 , 4.0 Imp qt)

5.6 US qt (5.3 , 4.7 Imp qt)3.2 US qt (3.0 , 2.6 Imp qt)9.1 US qt (8.6 , 7.6 Imp qt)

1.11 US qt (1.05 , 0.92 Imp qt)1.16 US qt (1.10 , 0.97 Imp qt)2.6 US qt (2.5 , 2.2 Imp qt)6.9 US qt (6.5 , 5.7 Imp qt)

0.172 US gal (0.65 , 0.143 Imp gal)

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

Fuel tank

EnginecoolantEngine oil

AutomatictransmissionfluidDifferentialoilWindshieldwasherreservoir

1 :

2 :

Approx.

FrontRear

ChangeTotalChange

Including filterWithout filter

TotalChangeTotal

ChangeTotalU.S. CarsCanada Cars

1

2

01/09/28 20:15:54 31SZ3660_315

－

＊

－－－－－－－－－－－－－－

－－

＊


Specifications

313

Lights Engine

Alignment

Tires

Battery

Fuses

12 V12 V

55 W (H1) (High beam)27/8 W

3.54 x 3.58 in (90 x 91 mm)212 cu-in (3,474 cm )

9.6 : 1

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°0° 30’

2° 50’

P225/55R16 94VT135/80D16 101M

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

21 W21/5 W55 W (H1)21 W3 CP21 W3 CP5 W5 W3.4 W3.4 W2 W

HeadlightsFront turn signal/parking lightsRear turn signal lightsStop/TaillightsFront fog lightsHigh-mount brake lightFront side marker lightsBack-up lightsLicense plate lightsCeiling lights

Trunk lightDoor courtesy lightsVanity mirror light

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Water cooled 4-strokeSOHC V-6 gasoline engine

Toe

Camber

Caster

Size

Pressure

See spark plug maintenancesection page 246 .

Capacity 12 V 55 AH/5 HR

Interior

Under-hood See page 304 or the fuse boxcover.

See page 305 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door under the dashboard.

65 AH/20 HR12 V

FrontRearFrontRearFront

Front/RearSpareFront/RearSpare

inFrontRear

Low beam headlight bulbs are a type of high voltage dischargetube (D2R).

1 :

1

01/09/28 20:16:19 31SZ3660_316

－The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The tires on your car meet all U.S.Federal Safety Requirements. Alltires are also graded for treadwear,traction, and temperature perform-ance according to Department ofTransportation (DOT) standards.The following explains thesegradings.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thesegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

Treadwear

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

DOT Quality Grades

Traction AA, A, B, C

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)


01/09/28 20:16:30 31SZ3660_317

－ Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)


Temperature A, B, C

315

01/09/28 20:16:36 31SZ3660_318

Some conventional gasolines arebeing blended with alcohol or anether compound. These gasolinesare collectively referred to asoxygenated fuels. To meet clean airstandards, some areas of the UnitedStates and Canada use oxygenatedfuels to help reduce emissions.

If you use an oxygenated fuel, besure it is unleaded and meets theminimum octane rating requirement.

Before using an oxygenated fuel, tryto confirm the fuel’s contents. Somestates/provinces require thisinformation to be posted on thepump.

(Methyl Tertiary ButylEther)You may use gasoline containing upto 15 percent MTBE by volume.

(ethyl or grain alcohol)You may use gasoline containing upto 10 percent ethanol by volume.Gasoline containing ethanol may bemarketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’

The following are the U.S. EPA andCanadian CGSB approvedpercentages of oxygenates:

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Fuel system damage or performanceproblems resulting from the use ofan oxygenated fuel containing morethan the percentages of oxygenatesgiven above are not covered underwarranty.

(methyl or woodalcohol)Your vehicle was not designed to usefuel that contains methanol.Methanol can corrode metal parts inthe fuel system, and also damageplastic and rubber components. Thisdamage would not be covered byyour warranties.

MTBE

ETHANOL

METHANOL

Oxygenated Fuels


01/09/28 20:16:45 31SZ3660_319

If you are planning to take yourAcura outside the U.S. or Canada,contact the tourist bureaus in theareas you will be traveling in to findout about the availability of unleadedgasoline with the proper octanerating.

If unleaded gasoline is not available,be aware that using leaded gasolinein your Acura will affect perfor-mance and fuel mileage, and damageits emissions controls. It will nolonger comply with U.S. andCanadian emissions regulations, andwill be illegal to operate in NorthAmerica. To bring your car back intocompliance will require the replace-ment of several components, such asthe oxygen sensors and the threeway catalytic converter. These re-placements are not covered underwarranty.

Driving in Foreign Countries


01/09/28 20:16:50 31SZ3660_320

＊

＊

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page

.

In Canada, Acura vehicles complywith the Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards (CMVSS) forEmissions valid at the time they aremanufactured.

The burning of gasoline in your car’sengine produces several byproducts.Some of these are carbon monoxide(CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) andhydrocarbons (HC). Gasolineevaporating from the tank alsoproduces hydrocarbons. Controllingthe production of NOx, CO, and HCis important to the environment.Under certain conditions of sunlightand climate, NOx and HC react toform photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbonmonoxide does not contribute tosmog creation, but it is a poisonousgas.

Your car has a Positive CrankcaseVentilation System. This keepsgasses that build up in the engine’scrankcase from going into theatmosphere. The Positive CrankcaseVentilation valve routes them from

the crankcase back to the intakemanifold. They are then drawn intothe engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

218

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Emissions Controls


01/09/28 20:17:00 31SZ3660_321

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,Ignition Timing Control, ExhaustGas Recirculation and Three WayCatalytic Converter. These foursystems work together to control theengine’s combustion and minimizethe amount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI System uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: Air Intake,Engine Control, and Fuel Control.The Powertrain Control Module(PCM) uses various sensors todetermine how much air is goinginto the engine. It then controls howmuch fuel to inject under all operat-ing conditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO and NOx produced.

The Exhaust Gas Recirculation(EGR) system takes some of theexhaust gas and routes it back intothe intake manifold. Adding exhaustgas to the air/fuel mixture reducesthe amount of NOx produced whenthe fuel is burned.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), dinitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newGenuine Acura replacement parts ortheir equivalent for repairs. Usinglower quality parts may increase theemissions from your car.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions Controls


01/09/28 20:17:12 31SZ3660_322

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Acura partor its equivalent.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your car away from high grass,dry leaves, or other flammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your car’s three way catalyticconverter.

Have your car diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter


TTHHRREEEE WWAAYY CCAATTAALLYYTTIICC CCOONNVVEERRTTEERR

01/09/28 20:17:20 31SZ3660_323

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle re-tested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for re-testingby doing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 8hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 20° and95°F.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission). Increasethe engine speed to 2,000 rpm andhold it there until the temperaturegauge rises to at least 1/4 of thescale (approximately 3 minutes).

CONTINUED

State Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes


01/09/28 20:17:30 31SZ3660_324

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour Acura dealer.

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (A/T). Do not use the cruisecontrol. When traffic allows, drivefor 90 seconds without moving theaccelerator pedal. (Vehicle speedmay vary slightly; this is okay.) Ifyou cannot do this for acontinuous 90 seconds because oftraffic conditions, drive for at least30 seconds, then repeat it twomore times (for a total of 90seconds).

4


State Emissions Testing

322

01/09/28 20:17:35 31SZ3660_325

Customer Relations................................Information . 324

.............Canada Zone Office Map . 325....................Warranty Coverages . 326

Reporting Safety Defects..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 327

.....................Authorized Manuals . 329

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty and Customer Relations 323

01/09/28 20:17:39 31SZ3660_326

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact the AcuraCustomer Relations Office.

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Acura dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. TheService Manager or GeneralManager can help. Almost allproblems are solved in this way.

U.S. Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

Vortex Motor Corp.Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816

San Juan, PR 00919-0816(787) 250-4327

Refer to the Canadian Zone OfficeMap on the next page.

Canadian Owners:

Acura Automobile DivisionClient Services Office

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.1919 Torrance Blvd.

Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 382-2238

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your carDate of purchaseMileage on your carYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thecar to you

310

Customer Relations Information

Warranty and Customer Relations324

01/09/28 20:17:48 31SZ3660_327

Canada Zone Office Map

Warranty and Customer Relations 325

CUSTOMER RELATIONSRELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE

Honda Canada Inc.National Office

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9

Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909Toronto (416) 287-4776

01/09/28 20:17:53 31SZ3660_328

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

Your new Acura is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from an Acura dealer.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’s emis-sions control systems. Time, mileage,and coverage are conditional. Pleaseread the warranty manual for exactinformation.

covers all genuineAcura replacement parts againstdefects in materials and workman-ship.

genuine Acura Accessories arecovered under this warranty. Timeand mileage limits depend on thetype of accessory and other factors.Please read your warranty manualfor details.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2002 Acura Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your car forprecise information on warrantycoverages. Your Acura’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2002 WarrantyManual that came with your car.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Warranty Coverages

Warranty and Customer Relations326

01/09/28 20:18:05 31SZ3660_329

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying Acura AutomobileDivision, American Honda Motor Co.,Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or AcuraAutomobile Division, AmericanHonda Motor Co., Inc.

Warranty and Customer Relations

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

327

01/09/28 20:18:11 31SZ3660_330

328

01/09/28 20:18:14 31SZ3660_331

＊

＊

＊

－

＊２００２

ＡＣＵ

The following publications covering the operation andservicing of your vehicle can be obtained from HelmIncorporated, either by filling out the attached form or,for credit card holders, calling the toll-free phone numberon the form. For manuals prior to the year shown below,contact Helm Incorporated, P.O. Box 07280, Detroit,Michigan 48207, or call 1-800-782-4356.

Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners shouldcontact their authorized Acura dealer.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

329

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Price

Each

$75.00

$36.00

$45.00

$42.00

$40.00

$27.00

FREE

Publication

Form Number

61SZ305

61SZ306

61SZ306EL

61SZ330

31SZ3660

31SZ3760

ACU-R

Form Description

1996-2001 Acura 3.5 RL

Service Manual

2002 Acura 3.5 RL

Service Manual Supplement

1996-2002 Acura 3.5 RL

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

1996-2002 Acura 3.5 RL

Body Repair Manual

2002 Acura 3.5 RL

Owner’s Manual

2002 Acura 3.5 RL

Navigation Manual

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.00

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurringobligation.

01/09/28 20:18:26 31SZ3660_332

－

－

－

ＳＨＩＰ

ＴＯ

ＰＡＹＭＥＮＴ

This manual complements the Service Manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

330

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

01/09/28 20:18:37 31SZ3660_333

CONTINUED

...Accessories and Modifications . 184................................Accessories . 184

.Additional Safety Precautions . 185............................Modifications . 185

ACCESSORY (Ignition Key.......................................Position) . 78

.............Accessory Power Socket . 108....................Additives, Engine Oil . 228

.........................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 43, 45.....................Air Cleaner Element . 241

.................Air Conditioning Filter . 252..............Air Conditioning System . 114

..............................Maintenance . 251.................................Usage . 116, 121

.......................Air Outlets (Vents) . 114

.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 253...........................Alarm, Anti-theft . 156

.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 316.......Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning . 275

......................................Antifreeze . 231Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 56, 199...................................Operation . 199

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 156

Anti-theft Steering Column..............................................Lock . 77

..........................Anti-theft System . 157

..........................Appearance Care . 273............................................Armrest . 89.........................................Ashtrays . 110

...............Audio Controls, Remote . 155................................Audio System . 128

Automatic Climate Control........................................System . 114

.........................Automatic Lighting . 64Automatic Seat Belt

...................................Tensioners . 41.............Automatic Speed Control . 158..............Automatic Transmission . 192

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 312...............Checking Fluid Level . 238

.......................................Shifting . 192.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 192

................Shift Lever Positions . 192....................Shift Lock Release . 195

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 54, 296............................Jump Starting . 290

..............................Maintenance . 246............................Specifications . 313

..............................Before Driving . 177....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 40

...........................Beverage Holder . 104...................................Body Repair . 280

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 198

.............Break-in, New Linings . 178....................Bulb Replacement . 266

...........................................Fluid . 239.......................................Parking . 102

.................System Indicator . 54, 299........................Wear Indicators . 197

.............................Braking System . 197........................Break-in, New Car . 198

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 66........................Brights, Headlights . 63

Index

A B

I

01/09/28 20:18:43 31SZ3660_334

＊

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 266

..............................Brake Lights . 266............................Ceiling Lights . 269

........................Courtesy Lights . 269.................................Fog Lights . 263

........Front Side Marker Lights . 265.................................Headlights . 262

.........High-mount Brake Light . 267.................License Plate Lights . 268

............................Specifications . 313...............................Trunk Light . 270

....................Turn Signal Lights . 265..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 262

..................................Cancel Button . 75............................Capacities Chart . 312

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 49............................Carrying, Cargo . 186

Cassette Player............................................Care . 148

...........................Operation . 133, 145..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii

..................CD Changer . 136, 149, 151

................................Ceiling Lights . 111........................Certification Label . 310

............................................Chains . 259Changing Oil

........................................How to . 229......................................When to . 218

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 283............Changing Engine Coolant . 233

...Charging System Indicator . 54, 297............Checklist, Before Driving . 190

.....................................Child Safety . 20.......................................Child Seats . 24

............Tether Anchorage Point . 39..................Childproof Door Locks . 82

..........................Cigarette Lighter . 109...................................Cleaner, Air . 241

Cleaning....................Aluminum Wheels . 275

...................................Carpeting . 276......................................Exterior . 274

.........................................Fabric . 276.......................................Interior . 276.......................................Leather . 276

...................................Seat Belts . 276...........................................Vinyl . 276

....................................Windows . 277

................................Wood Trim . 277...............Climate Control System . 114

.........................Clock, Setting the . 102.....................Code, Audio System . 136

........................CO in the Exhaust . 318........................................Coin Box . 106

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 191..............................Compact Spare . 282

.................Console Compartment . 106...............Consumer Information . 324

.............Controls, Instruments and . 51Coolant

........................................Adding . 231....................................Checking . 182

.........................Proper Solution . 231...................................Replacing . 233

...................Temperature Gauge . 60....................Corrosion Protection . 279

............................Courtesy Lights . 117Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 318............Cruise Control Operation . 158..........Customer Relations Office . 324

Index

C

II

01/09/28 20:18:49 31SZ3660_335

CONTINUED

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 2, 52

................Daytime Running Lights . 65............Defects, Reporting Safety . 327

................Defogger, Rear Window . 71

......Defrosting the Windows . 120, 124..............................Differential Oil . 239

....................................Dimensions . 312...............Dimming the Headlights . 63

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 238

..................................Engine Oil . 181..........................Directional Signals . 66

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 197.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 230

Doors..............Locking and Unlocking . 78

....................Lockout Prevention . 79..............................Monitor Light . 57

......................Power Door Locks . 78..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 314

.....................................Drive Belts . 252...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 189....................................Economy . 183

.........................In Bad Weather . 204................In Foreign Countries . 317

Driving Position Memory..........................................System . 97

..............................Economy, Fuel . 183............Emergencies on the Road . 281.............Battery, Jump Starting . 290...........Brake System Indicator . 299

................Changing a Flat Tire . 283.....Charging System Indicator . 296

..................Checking the Fuses . 302.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 295...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 297...Manually Closing Moonroof . 300

..................Overheated Engine . 293.........................Emergency Brake . 102

......................Emergency Flashers . 70......................Emergency Towing . 306.......................Emissions Controls . 318

..............Emissions Testing,State . 321

Engine............................................Belts . 252

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 60Malfunction Indicator

................................Lamp . 55, 297........Oil Pressure Indicator . 54, 295..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 227

...............................Overheating . 293............................Specifications . 313............................Speed Limiter . 194

.......................................Starting . 191...................Engine Speed Limiter . 194

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 316.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 318

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 49Exhaust Gas Recirculation

........................................System . 319Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 18..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 274

............................Fabric, Cleaning . 276

Index

D

E

F

III

01/09/28 20:18:55 31SZ3660_336

..........................Fan, Interior . 118, 123Features, Comfort and

..............................Convenience . 113....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 179

Filters................................Air Cleaner . 241

.......................Air Conditioning . 252...............................................Oil . 229

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 70...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 283

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 238

..........................................Brake . 239................................Differential . 239

..........................Power Steering . 240..................Windshield Washer . 237

FM Stereo Radio...........................Reception . 129, 139

........................................Fog Lights . 67.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 317

..........................Four-way Flashers . 70..............................Front Airbags . 9, 43

.................................................Fuel . 178......................Fill Door and Cap . 179

...........................................Gauge . 60................Octane Requirement . 178

...............................Oxygenated . 316........................Reserve Indicator . 57

........................Tank, Filling the . 179..............Fuel Mileage, Improving . 183

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 302

..........................................Gasohol . 316.........................................Gasoline . 178

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 57...........................................Gauge . 60

................Octane Requirement . 178........................Tank, Filling the . 179

................Gas Station Procedures . 179.............................................Gauges . 58

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 60...............................................Fuel . 60

...............................Speedometer . 58.................................Tachometer . 58

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight.......................................Rating) . 207

............Gearshift Lever Positions . 192..............................Glass Cleaning . 278

........................................Glove Box . 88

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight.......................................Rating) . 207

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 262..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 70

Headlights....................Automatic Lighting . 64

............Daytime Running Lights . 65..................High Beam Indicator . 57

....................Lights On Indicator . 55.........................Reminder Chime . 63

........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 262...................................Turning on . 63

..............................Head Restraints . 88.....................Heating and Cooling . 114

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 191.................High-Low Beam Switch . 63..............High-mount Brake Light . 267

HomeLink Universal...............................Transmitter . 162

....................................Hood Latch . 241.......................Hood, Opening the . 180

..................................................Horn . 62.................................Hydroplaning . 205

Index

G

H

IV

01/09/28 20:19:00 31SZ3660_337

CONTINUED

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 310Ignition

..............................................Keys . 74...........................................Switch . 77

............Timing Control System . 319........................Immobilizer System . 75

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6Indicators, Instrument

.............................................Panel . 53...............................Infant Restraint . 28

......................................Infant Seats . 28..........Tether Anchorage Points . 39

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 253...................................Inside Mirror . 91

.............................Inspection, Tire . 255............................Instrument Panel . 53

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 66...........................Interior Cleaning . 277

........................................Introduction . i

........................Jacking up the Car . 284.......................................Jack, Tire . 284

................................Jump Starting . 290

..................................................Keys . 74

.......................Label, Certification . 310.................Lane Change, Signaling . 66

..........................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 40...................................Learning Key . 75

.........................Leather, Cleaning . 276........................Lights On Indicator . 55

.........................Lighter, Cigarette . 109Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 262........................................Ceiling . 111

.....................................Courtesy . 112

.......................................Indicator . 53.........................................Parking . 63

..................................Turn Signal . 66.....................................Load Limit . 187

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 77Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 77

..........................Childproof Door . 82............................Fuel Fill Door . 179

....................................Glove Box . 85.................................Power Door . 78

...........................................Trunk . 83........Trunk Pass-through Cover . 90

........................Low Coolant Level . 182.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 57

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 54, 295Lubricant Specifications

..........................................Chart . 312.........................................Luggage . 186

..................................Maintenance . 213...Owner Maintenance Checks . 225

.................................Record . 223-224......................Required Indicator . 61

..........................................Safety . 214.............................Schedule . 218-222

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 55, 297.............Memory, Driving Position . 93

...............................Meters, Gauges . 58

Index

I

J

K

L

M

V

01/09/28 20:19:09 31SZ3660_338

...................Methanol in Gasoline . 316..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 91

.......................................Moonroof . 100......................Closing Manually . 300

...................................Operation . 100

...................Neutral Gear Position . 193..................New Vehicle Break-in . 178

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 310

...................Radiator Overheating . 293...Radio/Cassette Sound System . 128

...........................Readiness Codes . 298..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 264

..........................Rear Seat Armrest . 90............................Rear Ventilation . 126............................Rear View Mirror . 91

.................Rear Window Defogger . 71...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 87

.............................Reminder Lights . 53.......................Remote Transmitter . 79

Replacement Information.................Air Cleaner Element . 241

.............Air Conditioning Filter . 252

..............................Paint Touch-up . 275..............Panel Brightness Control . 66

........................Park Gear Position . 193...........................................Parking . 196

...............................Parking Brake . 106Parking Brake and Brake

.................System Indicator . 54, 299.................................Parking Lights . 63

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 320.............................PGM-FI System . 319

..................Polishing and Waxing . 275............Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 11

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18

............................Protecting Adults . 12...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18........................Protecting Children . 20.......................Protecting Infants . 28

.......Protecting Larger Children . 35.........Protecting Small Children . 32

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 39

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 178.........................................Odometer . 59

...............................Odometer, Trip . 59Oil

........................Change, How to . 229......................Change, When to . 218......................Checking Engine . 181..............Pressure Indicator . 54, 295

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 228

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 80

Onboard Refueling Vapor....................................Recovery . 310

............................................OnStar . 167.........................Opening the Trunk . 83

..Operation in Foreign Countries . 317..............................Outside Mirrors . 91

....Outside Temperature Indicator . 59....................Overheating, Engine . 293

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 225.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 316

Index

N

O

PR

VI

01/09/28 20:19:16 31SZ3660_339

＊

＊

CONTINUED

..........................Engine Coolant . 233................Engine Oil and Filter . 229

..........................................Fuses . 302................................Light Bulbs . 262

....................................Schedule . 216................................Spark Plugs . 243

...........................................Tires . 257.............................Wiper Blades . 249

Replacing Seat Belts After a............................................Crash . 42

...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 182..................Reverse Gear Position . 193

................................Rotation, Tire . 256

........................................Safety Belts . 8.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 327

.................................Safety Features . 7...........................................Airbags . 9

..................................Door Locks . 10..........................Head Restraints . 10

.......................................Seat Belts . 8.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 10

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 50...............................Safety Messages . ii

.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 40...............Additional Information . 40

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18.Automatic Seat Belt Tensioner . 41

.............Child Seat Anchor Plate . 39.....................................Cleaning . 277

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 40................................Maintenance . 42

Reminder Light and................................Beeper . 40, 54

................................Replacement . 42...................System Components . 40

...............Use During Pregnancy . 18...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 15

....................................Seat Heaters . 95....................Seat Position Memory . 93

........................Seats, Adjusting the . 86................Security Alarm System . 157

...............................Serial Number . 310...........................Service Intervals . 218...........................Service Manual . 329

.........Service Station Procedures . 179..........................Setting the Clock . 102

Shifting the Automatic.............................Transmission . 192

.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 192

........................Shift Lock Release . 195....................................Side Airbags . 45

How The Side Airbag Indicator............................Light Works . 47

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 45Side Marker Lights, Bulb

.........................Replacement in . 265...............................Signaling Turns . 66

.........................................Ski Sleeve . 96.....................................Snow Tires . 259

...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 274................................Sound System . 128

Spare Tire......................................Inflating . 282

............................Specifications . 313................Spark Plugs, Replacing . 243

....................Specifications Charts . 312................................Speed Control . 158...................................Speedometer . 58

.......................................Spotlights . 111

Index

S

VII

01/09/28 20:19:23 31SZ3660_340

..........SRS, Additional Information . 43...Additional Safety Precautions . 48

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 41

..How the SRS Indicator Works . 46.....How Your Airbags Work . 43, 45

........................SRS Components . 43..................................SRS Service . 48

.............................SRS Indicator . 46, 55....START (Ignition Key Position) . 77

.......................Starting the Engine . 191In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 191................With a Dead Battery . 290

..........State Emissions Testing . 322........Steam Coming from Engine . 293

Steering Wheel................................Adjustments . 71

.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 77........................Position Memory . 93

...................Stereo Sound System . 128...........................Storing Your Car . 272

........................................Sun Visor . 107........................Sunglasses Holder . 107

Supplemental Restraint............................System . 9, 43, 45

....................Service Precautions . 48......................................Servicing . 48

.........................SRS Indicator . 46, 55...................System Components . 43

...............Tensioners, Seat Belts . 41..................................Synthetic Oil . 228

.....................................Tachometer . 58......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 266

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 281...........................Tape Player . 133, 148

Technical Descriptions......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 314.....Emissions Control Systems . 318

.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 316Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 320.......................Temperature Gauge . 60

...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 41..............Tether Anchorage Points . 39

...............Theft Deterrent System . 157............................Theft Protection . 156

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 320..........................Time, Setting the . 102

....................................Timing Belt . 253

....................................Tire Chains . 259.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 283

...............................................Tires . 253..............................Air Pressure . 254

...................................Balancing . 256.........................Checking Wear . 255..........................Compact Spare . 282

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 314......................................Inflation . 253

..................................Inspection . 255..............................Maintenance . 256

...................................Replacing . 257......................................Rotating . 256

...........................................Snow . 259............................Specifications . 313

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 283...............................Torn Seat Belts . 42

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 206

..........By Emergency Wrecker . 306Transmission

Checking Fluid Level,..............................Automatic . 238

Index

T

VIII

01/09/28 20:19:28 31SZ3660_341

＊

＊

...........................Fluid Selection . 238..............Identification Number . 311.............Shifting the Automatic . 192

.....................................Treadwear . 314

.......................................Trip Meter . 59................................................Trunk . 83

........Emergency Trunk Opener . 84.................................Opening the . 83

...................Open Monitor Light . 57....................................Turn Signals . 66

.....................Underside, Cleaning . 279Unexpected, Taking Care

..........................................of the . 281....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 314

........................Unleaded Gasoline . 178.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 277

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 230

................................Vanity Mirror . 107.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 187

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 312

....Vehicle Identification Number . 310Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

....................................System . 201........VSA System Indicator . 56, 202

...VSA Activation Indicator . 56, 201.........................VSA Off Switch . 202

.............................Vehicle Storage . 271.....................................Ventilation . 116

.................................................VIN . 310...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 277

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 228

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 50

..................Warranty Coverages . 326Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 237.....................................Operation . 70

.........................................Washing . 274..................Waxing and Polishing . 275

Wheels...............Adjusting the Steering . 71............Alignment and Balance . 256

......Cleaning Aluminum Alloys . 275

..........................Compact Spare . 282......................................Wrench . 284

Windows.....................................Cleaning . 277

..................Operating the Power . 98...........................Rear, Defogger . 71

Windshield.......................................Cleaning . 68...........................Defroster . 120, 125

.......................................Washers . 70Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 249.....................................Operation . 68

....................................Wood Trim . 277

....................................Worn Tires . 255.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 306

U.S. and Canada only

Index

U

V

W

IX

01/09/28 20:19:34 31SZ3660_342

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Spare Tire Pressure:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Premium unleaded gasoline,pump octane number of 91 orhigher.

18.0 US gal (68 , 15.0 Imp gal)

API Service SJ ‘‘EnergyConserving’’ oil, SAE 5W-30viscosity (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

Front/Rear:30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

4.9 US qt (4.6 , 4.0 Imp qt)

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

227

238

240

240

01/09/28 20:19:51 31SZ3660_345

Documents

RL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRL0202OM/enu/RL...2002 RL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this